1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4@syncodeindex ky cp
5@c man begin INCLUDE
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8@include bfdver.texi
9@c man end
10
11@c @smallbook
12
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
22@set ARM
23@set C6X
24@set H8300
25@set HPPA
26@set I960
27@set M68HC11
28@set M68K
29@set MIPS
30@set MMIX
31@set MSP430
32@set NDS32
33@set NIOSII
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
39@set WIN32
40@set XTENSA
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
47* Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
50
51@copying
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
57
58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66@end copying
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
70@settitle The GNU linker
71@titlepage
72@title The GNU linker
73@sp 1
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103@c man end
104
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
107@contents
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110@ifnottex
111@node Top
112@top LD
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
118
119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120Documentation License version 1.3.  A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123@menu
124* Overview::                    Overview
125* Invocation::                  Invocation
126* Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300::                      ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas::                     ld and other Renesas micros
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960::                        ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM::				ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12::              ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32::                  ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K::                        ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS::                        ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32::               ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64::             ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF::			ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF::                     ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32::                       ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa::                      ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD::                         BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
180* MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
181* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
182* LD Index::                       LD Index
183@end menu
184@end ifnottex
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
191
192@ifset man
193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219@end ifset
220
221@ifclear SingleFormat
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}.  Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file.  @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235@c man end
236
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246@c man end
247
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options::                     Command Line Options
251* Environment::                 Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories.  (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language.  If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}).  This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects.  Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command.  @xref{Scripts}.
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent.  Note---there is one exception to
321this rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322only be preceded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
323@samp{-o} option.  So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
333
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
338
339@smallexample
340  gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.  Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler.  In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352  gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
358@table @gcctabopt
359@include at-file.texi
360
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}.  @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}.  This option may be used any number of times.
368
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library.  If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378interface.
379
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390archive-library search path.  @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391family}, for details.
392
393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file.  If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408that follow this option on the command line.  Even when @command{ld} is
409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format.  You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421particular format.
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
458@item -d
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}).  The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library.  If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use.  This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481@item -e @var{entry}
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8).  @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494exported.  The library names may be delimited by commas or colons.  Specifying
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export.  This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option.  For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link.  The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line.  This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker.  Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports.  PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545@ifclear SingleFormat
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
556@end ifclear
557
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field.  If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}.  If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object.  The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
582@item -F @var{name}
583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field.  The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}.  Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
608
609@cindex finalization function
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function.  By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623@cindex object size
624@item -G @var{value}
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}.  This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629sections.  This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
632@kindex -h @var{name}
633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
634@item -h @var{name}
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647@cindex initialization function
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function.  By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658@item -l @var{namespec}
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link.  This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.  Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.  (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.)  Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive.  However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.  However,
689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
694@kindex -L @var{dir}
695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696@item -L @var{searchdir}
697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts.  You may use this
700option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line.  Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories.  All
703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704order in which the options appear.  @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
707
708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
711
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715some cases also on how it was configured.  @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command.  Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
724@item -m @var{emulation}
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker.  You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
744Where object files are mapped into memory.
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map.  This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression.  Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets.  Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762   foo = 1
763   foo = foo * 4
764   foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771   0x00000001                foo = 0x1
772   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
773   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
794@item -N
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also, do
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option.  It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries.  Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default.  The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824the output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825should only be enabled for the final binary.  At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation.  Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option.  Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option.  Again this may change with future releases.
830
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}.  When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time.  It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables.  This results
867in larger executables.
868
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
880@kindex --relocatable
881@item -r
882@itemx --relocatable
883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884turn serve as input to @command{ld}.  This is often called @dfn{partial
885linking}.  As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
888@c ; see @option{-N}.
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced.  When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations.  Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs.  You may use this option more than once.
910
911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
918@item -s
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
925@item -S
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
932@item -t
933@itemx --trace
934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script.  This script replaces
942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944output file.  @xref{Scripts}.  If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options.  Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
948
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script.  @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed.  This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.  (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries.  @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.  This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file.  This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit.  The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together.  This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
994@item -Ur
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
997turn serve as input to @command{ld}.  When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to.  Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
1004@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005@cindex orphan sections
1006@cindex sections, orphan
1007@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008Control how orphan sections are handled.  An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script.  @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013@table @code
1014@item place
1015Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}.  The option
1017@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019@item discard
1020All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023@item warn
1024The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025issue a warning.
1026
1027@item error
1028The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029@end table
1030
1031The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
1033@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037missing, for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
1038specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
1039multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal merging of
1040input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041in a linker script.
1042
1043@kindex -v
1044@kindex -V
1045@kindex --version
1046@cindex version
1047@item -v
1048@itemx --version
1049@itemx -V
1050Display the version number for @command{ld}.  The @option{-V} option also
1051lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053@kindex -x
1054@kindex --discard-all
1055@cindex deleting local symbols
1056@item -x
1057@itemx --discard-all
1058Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060@kindex -X
1061@kindex --discard-locals
1062@cindex local symbols, deleting
1063@item -X
1064@itemx --discard-locals
1065Delete all temporary local symbols.  (These symbols start with
1066system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1068
1069@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex symbol tracing
1072@item -y @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears.  This
1075option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is necessary
1076to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081@kindex -Y @var{path}
1082@item -Y @var{path}
1083Add @var{path} to the default library search path.  This option exists
1084for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087@item -z @var{keyword}
1088The recognized keywords are:
1089@table @samp
1090
1091@item combreloc
1092Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093lookup caching possible.
1094
1095@item common
1096Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1097link.
1098
1099@item defs
1100Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined symbols in
1101shared libraries are still allowed.
1102
1103@item execstack
1104Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1105
1106@item global
1107This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.  It makes
1108the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1109of subsequently loaded libraries.
1110
1111@item initfirst
1112This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1113It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1114before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1115the process at the same time.  Similarly the runtime finalization of
1116the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1117objects.
1118
1119@item interpose
1120Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1121but the primary executable.
1122
1123@item lazy
1124When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1125dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1126the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1127Lazy binding is the default.
1128
1129@item loadfltr
1130Marks  the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1131runtime.
1132
1133@item muldefs
1134Allows multiple definitions.
1135
1136@item nocombreloc
1137Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1138
1139@item nocommon
1140Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1141link.
1142
1143@item nocopyreloc
1144Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1145defined in shared libraries.  May result in dynamic text relocations.
1146
1147@item nodefaultlib
1148Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1149ignore any default library search paths.
1150
1151@item nodelete
1152Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1153
1154@item nodlopen
1155Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1156
1157@item nodump
1158Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1159
1160@item noexecstack
1161Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1162
1163@item text
1164Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1165
1166@item notext
1167Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1168
1169@item textoff
1170Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1171
1172@item norelro
1173Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1174
1175@item now
1176When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1177dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1178when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1179deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1180first called.
1181
1182@item origin
1183Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1184
1185@item relro
1186Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1187
1188@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1189Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1190
1191@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1192Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1193
1194@item stack-size=@var{value}
1195Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1196Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1197@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1198
1199@item bndplt
1200Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1201
1202@item noextern-protected-data
1203Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1204library.  This option overrides linker backend default.  It can be used
1205to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1206generated by compiler.  Updates on protected data symbols by another
1207module aren't visible to the resulting shared library.  Supported for
1208i386 and x86-64.
1209
1210@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1211Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1212This option overrides linker backend default.  It can be used to avoid
1213dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1214Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1215
1216@item noreloc-overflow
1217Disable relocation overflow check.  This can be used to disable
1218relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1219overflow at run-time.  Supported for x86_64.
1220
1221@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1222@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1223@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1224@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1225@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1226Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1227to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1228@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1229@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1230@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1231@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1232@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1233Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1234
1235@end table
1236
1237Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1238
1239@kindex -(
1240@cindex groups of archives
1241@item -( @var{archives} -)
1242@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1243The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files.  They may be
1244either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1245
1246The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1247references are created.  Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1248the order that it is specified on the command line.  If a symbol in that
1249archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1250object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1251would not be able to resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives,
1252they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1253resolved.
1254
1255Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best to use
1256it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1257more archives.
1258
1259@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1260@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1261@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1262@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1263Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1264recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1265and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.  This was
1266the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14.  The default
1267behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1268so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1269restore the old behaviour.
1270
1271@kindex --as-needed
1272@kindex --no-as-needed
1273@item --as-needed
1274@itemx --no-as-needed
1275This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1276on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option.  Normally
1277the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1278on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1279needed or not.  @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1280emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1281non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1282the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1283non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1284Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1285the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1286needed.  This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1287from archives.  @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1288
1289@kindex --add-needed
1290@kindex --no-add-needed
1291@item --add-needed
1292@itemx --no-add-needed
1293These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1294their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1295options.  They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1296and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1297
1298@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1299@item -assert @var{keyword}
1300This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1301
1302@kindex -Bdynamic
1303@kindex -dy
1304@kindex -call_shared
1305@item -Bdynamic
1306@itemx -dy
1307@itemx -call_shared
1308Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on platforms
1309for which shared libraries are supported.  This option is normally the
1310default on such platforms.  The different variants of this option are
1311for compatibility with various systems.  You may use this option
1312multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1313@option{-l} options which follow it.
1314
1315@kindex -Bgroup
1316@item -Bgroup
1317Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1318section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1319object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1320@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied.  This option is
1321only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1322
1323@kindex -Bstatic
1324@kindex -dn
1325@kindex -non_shared
1326@kindex -static
1327@item -Bstatic
1328@itemx -dn
1329@itemx -non_shared
1330@itemx -static
1331Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
1332platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
1333variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
1334may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1335library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it.  This
1336option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}.  This
1337option can be used with @option{-shared}.  Doing so means that a
1338shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1339references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1340libraries.
1341
1342@kindex -Bsymbolic
1343@item -Bsymbolic
1344When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1345definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it is possible
1346for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1347within the shared library.  This option can also be used with the
1348@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1349executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1350the executable.  This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1351support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1352
1353@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1354@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1355When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1356symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1357This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1358when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1359to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1360This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1361libraries and position independent executables.
1362
1363@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1364@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1365Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker.  This is
1366typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1367global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1368within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1369to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1370in the executable.  This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1371which support shared libraries.
1372
1373The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1374scope and node name.  See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1375
1376@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1377@item --dynamic-list-data
1378Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1379
1380@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1381@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1382Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.  It
1383is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1384
1385@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1386@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1387Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1388
1389@kindex --check-sections
1390@kindex --no-check-sections
1391@item --check-sections
1392@itemx --no-check-sections
1393Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1394been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the linker will
1395perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1396suitable error messages.  The linker does know about, and does make
1397allowances for sections in overlays.  The default behaviour can be
1398restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1399Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links.  You can
1400force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1401option.
1402
1403@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1404@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1405@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1406@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1407This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1408by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1409command line.  Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1410output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1411input dynamic library.  With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1412specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1413follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added.  The default
1414behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1415
1416This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1417libraries.  With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1418mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1419their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1420required by the output binary.  With the default setting however
1421the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1422dynamic library itself.  No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1423symbols.
1424
1425@cindex cross reference table
1426@kindex --cref
1427@item --cref
1428Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
1429generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1430Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1431
1432The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1433easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are printed out,
1434sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file names is given.  If the
1435symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1436definition.  If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1437where this happens appear next.  Finally any files that reference the
1438symbol are listed.
1439
1440@cindex common allocation
1441@kindex --no-define-common
1442@item --no-define-common
1443This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1444The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1445@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1446
1447The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1448the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1449of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1450forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1451Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1452from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1453This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1454and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1455duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1456paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1457
1458@cindex symbols, from command line
1459@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1460@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1461Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1462address given by @var{expression}.  You may use this option as many
1463times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.  A
1464limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1465context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1466symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1467constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1468using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1469@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1470equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1471
1472@cindex demangling, from command line
1473@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1474@kindex --no-demangle
1475@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1476@itemx --no-demangle
1477These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1478and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1479present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1480underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1481mangled symbol names into user readable names.  Different compilers have
1482different mangling styles.  The optional demangling style argument can be used
1483to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will
1484demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1485is set.  These options may be used to override the default.
1486
1487@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1488@kindex -I@var{file}
1489@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1490@item -I@var{file}
1491@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1492Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
1493generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
1494linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1495doing.
1496
1497@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1498@item --no-dynamic-linker
1499When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1500linker to be used at load-time.  This is only meaningful for ELF
1501executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1502entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1503
1504@kindex --fatal-warnings
1505@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1506@item --fatal-warnings
1507@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1508Treat all warnings as errors.  The default behaviour can be restored
1509with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1510
1511@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1512@item  --force-exe-suffix
1513Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1514
1515If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1516@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1517the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1518option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1519Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1520it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1521
1522@kindex --gc-sections
1523@kindex --no-gc-sections
1524@cindex garbage collection
1525@item --gc-sections
1526@itemx --no-gc-sections
1527Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored on
1528targets that do not support this option.  The default behaviour (of not
1529performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1530@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.  Note that garbage
1531collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1532implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1533
1534@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1535examining symbols and relocations.  The section containing the entry
1536symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1537command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1538referenced by dynamic objects.  Note that when building shared
1539libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1540referenced.  Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1541the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1542relocations.  See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1543
1544This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1545@samp{-r}).  In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1546specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1547a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1548
1549@kindex --print-gc-sections
1550@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1551@cindex garbage collection
1552@item --print-gc-sections
1553@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1554List all sections removed by garbage collection.  The listing is
1555printed on stderr.  This option is only effective if garbage
1556collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option.  The
1557default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1558be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1559line.
1560
1561@kindex --print-output-format
1562@cindex output format
1563@item --print-output-format
1564Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1565other command-line options).  This is the string that would appear
1566in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1567
1568@kindex --print-memory-usage
1569@cindex memory usage
1570@item --print-memory-usage
1571Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1572the @ref{MEMORY} command.  This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1573quick view of amount of free memory.  The format of the output has one
1574headline and one line per region.  It is both human readable and easily
1575parsable by tools.  Here is an example of an output:
1576
1577@smallexample
1578Memory region         Used Size  Region Size  %age Used
1579             ROM:        256 KB         1 MB     25.00%
1580             RAM:          32 B         2 GB      0.00%
1581@end smallexample
1582
1583@cindex help
1584@cindex usage
1585@kindex --help
1586@item --help
1587Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1588
1589@kindex --target-help
1590@item --target-help
1591Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1592
1593@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1594@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1595Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}.  See the description of the
1596@option{-M} option, above.
1597
1598@cindex memory usage
1599@kindex --no-keep-memory
1600@item --no-keep-memory
1601@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1602symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells @command{ld} to
1603instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1604necessary.  This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1605while linking a large executable.
1606
1607@kindex --no-undefined
1608@kindex -z defs
1609@item --no-undefined
1610@itemx -z defs
1611Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.  This
1612is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1613The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1614behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1615libraries being linked in.
1616
1617@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1618@kindex -z muldefs
1619@item --allow-multiple-definition
1620@itemx -z muldefs
1621Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1622report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1623first definition will be used.
1624
1625@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1626@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1627@item --allow-shlib-undefined
1628@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1629Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1630This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1631determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1632shared library rather than a regular object file.  It does not affect
1633how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1634
1635The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1636referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1637an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1638a shared library.
1639
1640The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1641libraries specified at link time are that:
1642
1643@itemize @bullet
1644@item
1645A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1646that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1647resolvable at load time.
1648@item
1649There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1650symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1651
1652The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1653select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1654architecture.  This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1655appropriate memset function.
1656@end itemize
1657
1658@kindex --no-undefined-version
1659@item --no-undefined-version
1660Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1661it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1662will be issued instead.
1663
1664@kindex --default-symver
1665@item --default-symver
1666Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1667exported symbols.
1668
1669@kindex --default-imported-symver
1670@item --default-imported-symver
1671Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1672imported symbols.
1673
1674@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1675@item --no-warn-mismatch
1676Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1677files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1678been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1679This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1680errors.  This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1681have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1682inappropriate.
1683
1684@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1685@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1686Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1687library during a library search.  This option silences the warning.
1688
1689@kindex --no-whole-archive
1690@item --no-whole-archive
1691Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1692archive files.
1693
1694@cindex output file after errors
1695@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1696@item --noinhibit-exec
1697Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1698Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1699errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1700when it issues any error whatsoever.
1701
1702@kindex -nostdlib
1703@item -nostdlib
1704Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1705command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
1706(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1707
1708@ifclear SingleFormat
1709@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1710@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1711@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1712file.  If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1713@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1714object file.  Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1715object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1716should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1717usual format on each machine.  @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1718name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can
1719list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)  The script
1720command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1721this option overrides it.  @xref{BFD}.
1722@end ifclear
1723
1724@kindex -pie
1725@kindex --pic-executable
1726@item -pie
1727@itemx --pic-executable
1728@cindex position independent executables
1729Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only supported on
1730ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are similar to shared
1731libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1732address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations).  Like
1733normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1734defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1735
1736@kindex -qmagic
1737@item -qmagic
1738This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1739
1740@kindex -Qy
1741@item -Qy
1742This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1743
1744@kindex --relax
1745@cindex synthesizing linker
1746@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1747@cindex --no-relax
1748@item --relax
1749@itemx --no-relax
1750An option with machine dependent effects.
1751@ifset GENERIC
1752This option is only supported on a few targets.
1753@end ifset
1754@ifset H8300
1755@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1756@end ifset
1757@ifset I960
1758@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1759@end ifset
1760@ifset XTENSA
1761@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1762@end ifset
1763@ifset M68HC11
1764@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1765@end ifset
1766@ifset NIOSII
1767@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1768@end ifset
1769@ifset POWERPC
1770@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1771@end ifset
1772
1773On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1774global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1775addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1776synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1777instructions, and combining constant values.
1778
1779On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1780debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1781@ifset GENERIC
1782This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1783family of processors.
1784@end ifset
1785
1786@ifset GENERIC
1787On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1788but ignored.
1789@end ifset
1790
1791On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1792@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1793
1794@cindex retaining specified symbols
1795@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1796@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1797@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1798@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1799Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1800discarding all others.  @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1801symbol name per line.  This option is especially useful in environments
1802@ifset GENERIC
1803(such as VxWorks)
1804@end ifset
1805where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1806run-time memory.
1807
1808@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1809or symbols needed for relocations.
1810
1811You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1812line.  It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1813
1814@ifset GENERIC
1815@item -rpath=@var{dir}
1816@cindex runtime library search path
1817@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1818Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used when
1819linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All @option{-rpath}
1820arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1821them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The @option{-rpath} option is
1822also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1823objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1824@option{-rpath-link} option.  If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1825ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1826@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1827
1828The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
1829SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1830@option{-L} options it is given.  If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1831runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1832options, ignoring the @option{-L} options.  This can be useful when using
1833gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1834file systems.
1835
1836For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1837followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1838the @option{-rpath} option.
1839@end ifset
1840
1841@ifset GENERIC
1842@cindex link-time runtime library search path
1843@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1844@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1845When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.  This
1846happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1847of the input files.
1848
1849When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1850non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1851shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1852explicitly.  In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1853specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
1854@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1855either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1856appearing multiple times.
1857
1858This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1859that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1860is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1861runtime linker would do.
1862
1863The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1864libraries:
1865@enumerate
1866@item
1867Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1868@item
1869Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options.  The difference
1870between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1871specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1872used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1873at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1874by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1875the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1876@item
1877On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1878@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1879environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1880@item
1881On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1882directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1883@item
1884For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1885variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1886@item
1887For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1888@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1889libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1890@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1891@item
1892The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1893@item
1894For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1895exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1896@end enumerate
1897
1898If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1899warning and continue with the link.
1900@end ifset
1901
1902@kindex -shared
1903@kindex -Bshareable
1904@item -shared
1905@itemx -Bshareable
1906@cindex shared libraries
1907Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1908and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1909shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1910undefined symbols in the link.
1911
1912@kindex --sort-common
1913@item --sort-common
1914@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1915@itemx --sort-common=descending
1916This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1917ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1918sections.  The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1919eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1920between symbols due to alignment constraints.  If no sorting order is
1921specified, then descending order is assumed.
1922
1923@kindex --sort-section=name
1924@item --sort-section=name
1925This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1926patterns in the linker script.
1927
1928@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1929@item --sort-section=alignment
1930This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1931patterns in the linker script.
1932
1933@kindex --split-by-file
1934@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1935Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1936each input file when @var{size} is reached.  @var{size} defaults to a
1937size of 1 if not given.
1938
1939@kindex --split-by-reloc
1940@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1941Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1942output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1943This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1944certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1945cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section.  Note
1946that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1947support arbitrary sections.  The linker will not split up individual
1948input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1949more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1950many relocations.  @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1951
1952@kindex --stats
1953@item --stats
1954Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1955as execution time and memory usage.
1956
1957@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1958@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1959Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1960configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
1961that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1962
1963@kindex --traditional-format
1964@cindex traditional format
1965@item --traditional-format
1966For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1967the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests @command{ld} to
1968use the traditional format instead.
1969
1970@cindex dbx
1971For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1972symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file with
1973full debugging information by over 30 percent.  Unfortunately, the SunOS
1974@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1975trouble).  The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1976combine duplicate entries.
1977
1978@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1979@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1980Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1981address given by @var{org}.  You may use this option as many
1982times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1983line.
1984@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1985for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1986@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values.  @emph{Note:} there
1987should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1988sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1989
1990@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1991@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1992@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1993@cindex segment origins, cmd line
1994@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1995@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1996@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1997Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1998@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1999
2000@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2001@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2002@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2003When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2004byte of the text segment.
2005
2006@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2007@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2008@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2009When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2010the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2011text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2012
2013@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2014@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2015@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2016When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2017model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2018
2019@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2020@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2021Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four possible
2022values for @samp{method}:
2023
2024@table @samp
2025@item ignore-all
2026Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2027
2028@item report-all
2029Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
2030
2031@item ignore-in-object-files
2032Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2033ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2034
2035@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2036Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2037ignore them if they come from shared libraries.  This can be useful
2038when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2039libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2040command line.
2041@end table
2042
2043The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2044by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2045
2046Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2047unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2048can change this to a warning.
2049
2050@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2051@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2052@item --dll-verbose
2053@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2054Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2055supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.  Display
2056the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2057argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2058
2059@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2060@cindex version script, symbol versions
2061@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2062Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is typically
2063used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2064about the version hierarchy for the library being created.  This option
2065is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2066see @ref{VERSION}.  It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2067use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2068symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2069@xref{WIN32}.
2070
2071@kindex --warn-common
2072@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2073@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2074@item --warn-common
2075Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2076a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2077but linkers on some other operating systems do not.  This option allows
2078you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2079Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2080warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2081
2082There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2083
2084@table @samp
2085@item int i = 1;
2086A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2087file.
2088
2089@item extern int i;
2090An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2091There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2092variable somewhere.
2093
2094@item int i;
2095A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2096variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2097The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2098single symbol.  If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2099size.  The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2100a definition of the same variable.
2101@end table
2102
2103The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2104Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2105just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2106encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two symbols will be
2107a common symbol.
2108
2109@enumerate
2110@item
2111Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2112definition for the symbol.
2113@smallexample
2114@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2115   overridden by definition
2116@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2117@end smallexample
2118
2119@item
2120Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2121the symbol is encountered.  This is the same as the previous case,
2122except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2123@smallexample
2124@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2125   overriding common
2126@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2127@end smallexample
2128
2129@item
2130Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2131@smallexample
2132@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2133   of `@var{symbol}'
2134@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2135@end smallexample
2136
2137@item
2138Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2139@smallexample
2140@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2141   overridden by larger common
2142@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2143@end smallexample
2144
2145@item
2146Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol.  This is
2147the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2148encountered in a different order.
2149@smallexample
2150@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2151   overriding smaller common
2152@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2153@end smallexample
2154@end enumerate
2155
2156@kindex --warn-constructors
2157@item --warn-constructors
2158Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for a few
2159object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2160detect the use of global constructors.
2161
2162@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2163@item --warn-multiple-gp
2164Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2165This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2166Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2167section.  A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2168of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2169base-register relative addressing mode.  Since the offset in
2170base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2171bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool.  Thus, in
2172large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2173values in order to be able to address all possible constants.  This
2174option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2175
2176@kindex --warn-once
2177@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2178@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2179@item --warn-once
2180Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2181which refers to it.
2182
2183@kindex --warn-section-align
2184@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2185@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2186@item --warn-section-align
2187Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2188alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2189The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2190is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2191the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2192
2193@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2194@item --warn-shared-textrel
2195Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2196
2197@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2198@item --warn-alternate-em
2199Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2200
2201@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2202@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2203If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2204@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2205This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2206
2207@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2208@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2209This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2210it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2211
2212@kindex --whole-archive
2213@cindex including an entire archive
2214@item --whole-archive
2215For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2216@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2217in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2218files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2219library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2220library.  This option may be used more than once.
2221
2222Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2223about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2224Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2225list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2226your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2227
2228@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2229@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2230Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}.  Any undefined reference to
2231@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}.  Any
2232undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2233@var{symbol}.
2234
2235This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
2236wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}.  If it
2237wishes to call the system function, it should call
2238@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2239
2240Here is a trivial example:
2241
2242@smallexample
2243void *
2244__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2245@{
2246  printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2247  return __real_malloc (c);
2248@}
2249@end smallexample
2250
2251If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2252all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2253instead.  The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2254call the real @code{malloc} function.
2255
2256You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2257links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed.  If you do this,
2258you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2259file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2260call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2261
2262@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2263@item --eh-frame-hdr
2264Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2265@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2266
2267@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2268@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2269Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2270generated code sections like PLT.  This option is on by default
2271if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2272
2273@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2274@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2275@item --enable-new-dtags
2276@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2277This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2278systems may not understand them. If you specify
2279@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2280and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2281If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2282created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2283those options are only available for ELF systems.
2284
2285@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2286@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2287Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2288close to @var{number}.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2289time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2290increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing this
2291value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2292
2293@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2294@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2295Set the type of linker's hash table(s).  @var{style} can be either
2296@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2297new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2298the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2299hash tables.  The default is @code{sysv}.
2300
2301@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2302@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2303@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2304@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2305@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2306@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2307@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2308@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2309On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2310compressed using zlib.  @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2311compress DWARF debug sections.
2312@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
2313sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2314instead of @samp{.debug}.  @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2315and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2316compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2317The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2318the configure options used to build the toolchain.  The default can be
2319determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
2320
2321@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2322@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2323This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2324linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2325for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2326about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2327
2328Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
23291021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2330run time.  This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2331has been used.
2332
2333The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2334enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2335
2336@kindex --build-id
2337@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2338@item --build-id
2339@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2340Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2341or a @code{.buildid} COFF section.  The contents of the note are
2342unique bits identifying this linked file.  @var{style} can be
2343@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2344@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2345@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2346the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2347string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2348@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored).  If @var{style}
2349is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2350
2351The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2352that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2353unique among all nonidentical output files.  It is not intended
2354to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents.  A linked
2355file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2356string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2357
2358Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2359@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2360
2361@kindex --warn-poison-system-directories
2362@item --warn-poison-system-directories
2363Warn for @option{-L} options using system directories such as
2364@file{/usr/lib} when cross linking.  This option is intended for use
2365in environments that want to detect and reject incorrect link settings.
2366
2367@kindex --no-warn-poison-system-directories
2368@item --no-warn-poison-system-directories
2369Do not warn for @option{-L} options using system directories such as
2370@file{/usr/lib} when cross linking.  This option is intended for use
2371in chroot environments when such directories contain the correct
2372libraries for the target system rather than the host.
2373
2374@kindex --error-poison-system-directories
2375@item --error-poison-system-directories
2376Give an error instead of a warning for @option{-L} options using
2377system directories when cross linking.
2378@end table
2379
2380@c man end
2381
2382@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2383
2384@c man begin OPTIONS
2385
2386The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2387the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2388normal executable.  You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2389use this option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2390@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2391like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2392symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2393object file).
2394
2395In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2396support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2397PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their
2398values by either a space or an equals sign.
2399
2400@table @gcctabopt
2401
2402@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2403@item --add-stdcall-alias
2404If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2405as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2406[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2407
2408@kindex --base-file
2409@item --base-file @var{file}
2410Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2411addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2412@file{dlltool}.
2413[This is an i386 PE specific option]
2414
2415@kindex --dll
2416@item --dll
2417Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
2418@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2419file.
2420[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2421
2422@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2423@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2424@item --enable-long-section-names
2425@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2426The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2427the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2428for COFF.  By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2429fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2430to support the longer names.  As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2431allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2432disallow it in object files, by using these two options.  Executable images
2433generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2434as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2435with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers.  However,
2436GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2437information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2438option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2439section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2440when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2441image and not stripping symbols.
2442[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2443
2444@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2445@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2446@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2447@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2448If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2449do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2450only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2451resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For example, the
2452undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2453@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2454to the function @code{_bar}.  When the linker does this, it prints a
2455warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2456import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2457to be usable.  If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2458feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed.  If you specify
2459@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2460mismatches are considered to be errors.
2461[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2462
2463@kindex --leading-underscore
2464@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2465@item --leading-underscore
2466@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2467For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2468in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2469disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2470
2471@cindex DLLs, creating
2472@kindex --export-all-symbols
2473@item --export-all-symbols
2474If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2475be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if there
2476otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
2477explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2478attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2479option is given.  Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2480@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2481@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2482exported.  Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2483re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2484such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2485@code{_iname}.  In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2486@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2487Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2488not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an
2489extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2490(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2491These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2492@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2493@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2494@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2495@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2496[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2497
2498@kindex --exclude-symbols
2499@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2500Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2501exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2502[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2503
2504@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2505@item --exclude-all-symbols
2506Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2507[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2508
2509@kindex --file-alignment
2510@item --file-alignment
2511Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always begin at
2512file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This defaults to
2513512.
2514[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2515
2516@cindex heap size
2517@kindex --heap
2518@item --heap @var{reserve}
2519@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2520Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2521to be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2522committed.
2523[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2524
2525@cindex image base
2526@kindex --image-base
2527@item --image-base @var{value}
2528Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll.  This is
2529the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2530is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2531your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2532other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2533for dlls.
2534[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2535
2536@kindex --kill-at
2537@item --kill-at
2538If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2539symbols before they are exported.
2540[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2541
2542@kindex --large-address-aware
2543@item --large-address-aware
2544If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2545header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2546greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2547or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2548section of the BOOT.INI.  Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2549[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2550
2551@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2552@item --disable-large-address-aware
2553Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2554This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2555driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2556addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2557[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2558
2559@kindex --major-image-version
2560@item --major-image-version @var{value}
2561Sets the major number of the ``image version''.  Defaults to 1.
2562[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2563
2564@kindex --major-os-version
2565@item --major-os-version @var{value}
2566Sets the major number of the ``os version''.  Defaults to 4.
2567[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2568
2569@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2570@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2571Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''.  Defaults to 4.
2572[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2573
2574@kindex --minor-image-version
2575@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2576Sets the minor number of the ``image version''.  Defaults to 0.
2577[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2578
2579@kindex --minor-os-version
2580@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2581Sets the minor number of the ``os version''.  Defaults to 0.
2582[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
2584@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2585@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2586Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''.  Defaults to 0.
2587[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2588
2589@cindex DEF files, creating
2590@cindex DLLs, creating
2591@kindex --output-def
2592@item --output-def @var{file}
2593The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2594file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
2595(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2596library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2597automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2598[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2599
2600@cindex DLLs, creating
2601@kindex --out-implib
2602@item --out-implib @var{file}
2603The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2604import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2605import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2606may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2607makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2608creation step.
2609[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2610
2611@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2612@item --enable-auto-image-base
2613@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2614Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2615@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2616By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2617for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2618execution are avoided.
2619[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2620
2621@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2622@item --disable-auto-image-base
2623Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
2624user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2625default.
2626[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2627
2628@cindex DLLs, linking to
2629@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2630@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2631When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2632search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2633@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2634between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2635uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2636@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2637[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2638
2639@kindex --enable-auto-import
2640@item --enable-auto-import
2641Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2642DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2643building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2644'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2645to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2646specification published by Microsoft.
2647
2648Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2649data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2650placed into the .data section instead.  This is in order to work
2651around a problem with consts that is described here:
2652http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2653
2654Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2655see this message:
2656
2657"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2658documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2659
2660This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2661ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2662allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2663fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2664constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL.  Any
2665multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2666this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact data type
2667of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2668the warning, and exit.
2669
2670There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2671data type of the exported variable:
2672
2673One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2674of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2675this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2676
2677A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2678that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.  For arrays,
2679there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2680a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable.  Thus:
2681
2682@example
2683extern type extern_array[];
2684extern_array[1] -->
2685   @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2686@end example
2687
2688or
2689
2690@example
2691extern type extern_array[];
2692extern_array[1] -->
2693   @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2694@end example
2695
2696For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2697is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2698
2699@example
2700extern struct s extern_struct;
2701extern_struct.field -->
2702   @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2703@end example
2704
2705or
2706
2707@example
2708extern long long extern_ll;
2709extern_ll -->
2710  @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2711@end example
2712
2713A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2714'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2715@code{__declspec(dllimport)}.  However, in practice that
2716requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2717building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2718merely building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice
2719between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2720constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2721
2722Original:
2723@example
2724--foo.h
2725extern int arr[];
2726--foo.c
2727#include "foo.h"
2728void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2729  printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2730@}
2731@end example
2732
2733Solution 1:
2734@example
2735--foo.h
2736extern int arr[];
2737--foo.c
2738#include "foo.h"
2739void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2740  /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2741  volatile int *parr = arr;
2742  printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2743@}
2744@end example
2745
2746Solution 2:
2747@example
2748--foo.h
2749/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2750#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2751  !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2752#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2753#else
2754#define FOO_IMPORT
2755#endif
2756extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2757--foo.c
2758#include "foo.h"
2759void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2760  printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2761@}
2762@end example
2763
2764A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2765library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2766for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2767functions).
2768[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2769
2770@kindex --disable-auto-import
2771@item --disable-auto-import
2772Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2773@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2774[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2775
2776@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2777@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2778If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2779that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2780a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2781environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2782[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2783
2784@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2785@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2786Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2787DLLs.
2788[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2789
2790@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2791@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2792Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2793[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2794
2795@kindex --section-alignment
2796@item --section-alignment
2797Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin at
2798addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to 0x1000.
2799[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2800
2801@cindex stack size
2802@kindex --stack
2803@item --stack @var{reserve}
2804@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2805Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2806to be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2807committed.
2808[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2809
2810@kindex --subsystem
2811@item --subsystem @var{which}
2812@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2813@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2814Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
2815legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2816@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}.  You may optionally set
2817the subsystem version also.  Numeric values are also accepted for
2818@var{which}.
2819[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2820
2821The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2822of the PE file header:
2823[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2824
2825@kindex --high-entropy-va
2826@item --high-entropy-va
2827Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2828(ASLR).
2829
2830@kindex --dynamicbase
2831@item --dynamicbase
2832The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2833randomization (ASLR).  This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2834Vista for i386 PE targets.
2835
2836@kindex --forceinteg
2837@item --forceinteg
2838Code integrity checks are enforced.
2839
2840@kindex --nxcompat
2841@item --nxcompat
2842The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2843This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2844
2845@kindex --no-isolation
2846@item --no-isolation
2847Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2848
2849@kindex --no-seh
2850@item --no-seh
2851The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2852this image.
2853
2854@kindex --no-bind
2855@item --no-bind
2856Do not bind this image.
2857
2858@kindex --wdmdriver
2859@item --wdmdriver
2860The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2861
2862@kindex --tsaware
2863@item --tsaware
2864The image is Terminal Server aware.
2865
2866@kindex --insert-timestamp
2867@item --insert-timestamp
2868@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2869Insert a real timestamp into the image.  This is the default behaviour
2870as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2871other, proprietary tools.  The problem with this default is that it
2872will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2873same sources are linked.  The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2874can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2875that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2876identically.
2877@end table
2878
2879@c man end
2880
2881@ifset C6X
2882@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2883
2884@c man begin OPTIONS
2885
2886The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2887libraries.  Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2888all executables use an index of 0.
2889
2890@table @gcctabopt
2891
2892@kindex --dsbt-size
2893@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2894This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2895or shared library to @var{size}.  The default is to create a table with 64
2896entries.
2897
2898@kindex --dsbt-index
2899@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2900This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2901to @var{index}.  The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2902executables.  If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2903@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2904
2905@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2906The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2907exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2908
2909@end table
2910
2911@c man end
2912@end ifset
2913
2914@ifset M68HC11
2915@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2916
2917@c man begin OPTIONS
2918
2919The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2920memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2921
2922@table @gcctabopt
2923
2924@kindex --no-trampoline
2925@item --no-trampoline
2926This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2927is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2928instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2929
2930@kindex --bank-window
2931@item --bank-window @var{name}
2932This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2933the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2934The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2935paging and addresses within the memory window.
2936
2937@end table
2938
2939@c man end
2940@end ifset
2941
2942@ifset M68K
2943@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2944
2945@c man begin OPTIONS
2946
2947The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2948when linking for 68K targets.
2949
2950@table @gcctabopt
2951
2952@kindex --got
2953@item --got=@var{type}
2954This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2955@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2956@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}.  For more information refer to the
2957Info entry for @file{ld}.
2958
2959@end table
2960
2961@c man end
2962@end ifset
2963
2964@ifset MIPS
2965@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2966
2967@c man begin OPTIONS
2968
2969The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2970generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2971
2972@table @gcctabopt
2973
2974@kindex --insn32
2975@item --insn32
2976@kindex --no-insn32
2977@itemx --no-insn32
2978These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2979generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2980or in relaxation.  If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
298132-bit instruction encodings.  By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2982used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2983possible.
2984
2985@end table
2986
2987@c man end
2988@end ifset
2989
2990@ifset UsesEnvVars
2991@node Environment
2992@section Environment Variables
2993
2994@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2995
2996You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2997@ifclear SingleFormat
2998@code{GNUTARGET},
2999@end ifclear
3000@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3001
3002@ifclear SingleFormat
3003@kindex GNUTARGET
3004@cindex default input format
3005@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3006use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}).  Its value should be one
3007of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}).  If there is no
3008@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3009of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3010attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3011this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3012there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3013object-file formats is unique.  However, the configuration procedure for
3014BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3015in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3016@end ifclear
3017
3018@kindex LDEMULATION
3019@cindex default emulation
3020@cindex emulation, default
3021@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3022@samp{-m} option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3023behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
3024available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.  If
3025the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3026variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3027linker was configured.
3028
3029@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3030@cindex demangling, default
3031Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
3032@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3033default to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in
3034a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program.  The default
3035may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3036options.
3037
3038@c man end
3039@end ifset
3040
3041@node Scripts
3042@chapter Linker Scripts
3043
3044@cindex scripts
3045@cindex linker scripts
3046@cindex command files
3047Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}.  This script is
3048written in the linker command language.
3049
3050The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3051the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3052the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts do nothing
3053more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3054direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3055described below.
3056
3057The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
3058yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3059linker executable.  You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3060to display the default linker script.  Certain command line options,
3061such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3062
3063You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3064line option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3065default linker script.
3066
3067You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3068to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  @xref{Implicit
3069Linker Scripts}.
3070
3071@menu
3072* Basic Script Concepts::	Basic Linker Script Concepts
3073* Script Format::		Linker Script Format
3074* Simple Example::		Simple Linker Script Example
3075* Simple Commands::		Simple Linker Script Commands
3076* Assignments::			Assigning Values to Symbols
3077* SECTIONS::			SECTIONS Command
3078* MEMORY::			MEMORY Command
3079* PHDRS::			PHDRS Command
3080* VERSION::			VERSION Command
3081* Expressions::			Expressions in Linker Scripts
3082* Implicit Linker Scripts::	Implicit Linker Scripts
3083@end menu
3084
3085@node Basic Script Concepts
3086@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3087@cindex linker script concepts
3088We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3089describe the linker script language.
3090
3091The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The output
3092file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3093@dfn{object file format}.  Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3094The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3095purposes we will also call it an object file.  Each object file has,
3096among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}.  We sometimes refer to a
3097section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3098in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3099
3100Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
3101also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3102contents}.  A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3103the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3104A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3105area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3106loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section
3107which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3108of debugging information.
3109
3110Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
3111first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address.  This is the address
3112the section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
3113@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
3114section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
3115same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3116is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3117(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3118based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3119RAM address would be the VMA.
3120
3121You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3122program with the @samp{-h} option.
3123
3124Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3125@dfn{symbol table}.  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol
3126has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3127information.  If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3128will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3129static variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
3130referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3131
3132You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3133program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3134option.
3135
3136@node Script Format
3137@section Linker Script Format
3138@cindex linker script format
3139Linker scripts are text files.
3140
3141You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
3142either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3143symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
3144generally ignored.
3145
3146Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3147If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3148otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3149double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3150file name.
3151
3152You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3153@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3154to whitespace.
3155
3156@node Simple Example
3157@section Simple Linker Script Example
3158@cindex linker script example
3159@cindex example of linker script
3160Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3161
3162The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3163@samp{SECTIONS}.  You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3164memory layout of the output file.
3165
3166The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command.  Here we will
3167describe a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of
3168code, initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
3169@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3170Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3171your input files.
3172
3173For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
31740x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
3175linker script which will do that:
3176@smallexample
3177SECTIONS
3178@{
3179  . = 0x10000;
3180  .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3181  . = 0x8000000;
3182  .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3183  .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3184@}
3185@end smallexample
3186
3187You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3188followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3189descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3190
3191The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3192sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3193counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3194other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3195current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
3196incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
3197@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3198
3199The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}.  The colon is
3200required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
3201after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3202which should be placed into this output section.  The @samp{*} is a
3203wildcard which matches any file name.  The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3204means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3205
3206Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3207@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3208@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3209
3210The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3211the output file.  The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3212at address @samp{0x8000000}.  After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3213output section, the value of the location counter will be
3214@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section.  The
3215effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3216immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3217
3218The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3219alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
3220example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3221sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3222may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3223sections.
3224
3225That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
3226
3227@node Simple Commands
3228@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3229@cindex linker script simple commands
3230In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3231
3232@menu
3233* Entry Point::			Setting the entry point
3234* File Commands::		Commands dealing with files
3235@ifclear SingleFormat
3236* Format Commands::		Commands dealing with object file formats
3237@end ifclear
3238
3239* REGION_ALIAS::		Assign alias names to memory regions
3240* Miscellaneous Commands::	Other linker script commands
3241@end menu
3242
3243@node Entry Point
3244@subsection Setting the Entry Point
3245@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3246@cindex start of execution
3247@cindex first instruction
3248@cindex entry point
3249The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3250point}.  You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3251entry point.  The argument is a symbol name:
3252@smallexample
3253ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3254@end smallexample
3255
3256There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set the
3257entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3258stopping when one of them succeeds:
3259@itemize @bullet
3260@item
3261the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3262@item
3263the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3264@item
3265the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined;  For many
3266targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3267check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3268@item
3269the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3270@item
3271The address @code{0}.
3272@end itemize
3273
3274@node File Commands
3275@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3276@cindex linker script file commands
3277Several linker script commands deal with files.
3278
3279@table @code
3280@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3281@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3282@cindex including a linker script
3283Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point.  The file will
3284be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3285with the @option{-L} option.  You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
328610 levels deep.
3287
3288You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3289@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3290
3291@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3292@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3293@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3294@cindex input files in linker scripts
3295@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3296@cindex linker script input object files
3297The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3298in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3299
3300For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3301a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3302then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3303
3304In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3305script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3306
3307In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3308with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3309located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3310for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}.  Otherwise, the linker will try to
3311open the file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the
3312linker will search through the archive library search path.
3313The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3314as the first character in the filename path.  See also the
3315description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3316
3317If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3318name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3319@samp{-l}.
3320
3321When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3322files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3323script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
3324
3325@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3326@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3327@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3328@cindex grouping input files
3329The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3330files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3331new undefined references are created.  See the description of @samp{-(}
3332in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3333
3334@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3335@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3336@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3337This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3338commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
3339as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3340with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3341when they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
3342@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3343and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3344setting afterwards.
3345
3346@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3347@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3348@cindex output file name in linker script
3349The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file.  Using
3350@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3351@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3352Line Options}).  If both are used, the command line option takes
3353precedence.
3354
3355You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3356output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3357
3358@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3359@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3360@cindex library search path in linker script
3361@cindex archive search path in linker script
3362@cindex search path in linker script
3363The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3364@command{ld} looks for archive libraries.  Using
3365@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3366on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If both
3367are used, then the linker will search both paths.  Paths specified using
3368the command line option are searched first.
3369
3370@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3371@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3372@cindex first input file
3373The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3374that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3375though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be useful
3376when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3377first file.
3378@end table
3379
3380@ifclear SingleFormat
3381@node Format Commands
3382@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3383A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3384
3385@table @code
3386@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3387@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3388@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3389@cindex output file format in linker script
3390The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3391output file (@pxref{BFD}).  Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3392exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3393(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If both are used, the command
3394line option takes precedence.
3395
3396You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3397formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3398This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3399desired endianness.
3400
3401If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3402will be the first argument, @var{default}.  If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3403output format will be the second argument, @var{big}.  If @samp{-EL} is
3404used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3405
3406For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3407command:
3408@smallexample
3409OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3410@end smallexample
3411This says that the default format for the output file is
3412@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3413option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3414format.
3415
3416@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3417@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3418@cindex input file format in linker script
3419The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3420files.  It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3421This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3422(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}).  If the @code{TARGET} command
3423is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3424command is also used to set the format for the output file.  @xref{BFD}.
3425@end table
3426@end ifclear
3427
3428@node REGION_ALIAS
3429@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3430@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3431@cindex region alias
3432@cindex region names
3433
3434Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3435@ref{MEMORY} command.  Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3436
3437@smallexample
3438REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3439@end smallexample
3440
3441The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3442memory region @var{region}.  This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3443to memory regions.  An example follows.
3444
3445Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3446memory storage devices.  All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3447that allows code execution or data storage.  Some may have a read-only,
3448non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3449access.  The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3450read-only data access and no code execution capability.  We have four output
3451sections:
3452
3453@itemize @bullet
3454@item
3455@code{.text} program code;
3456@item
3457@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3458@item
3459@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3460@item
3461@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3462@end itemize
3463
3464The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3465part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3466output sections to the memory regions available on the system.  Our embedded
3467systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3468@code{C}:
3469@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3470@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3471@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3472@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3473@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3474@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3475@end multitable
3476The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3477loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively.  Please note that
3478the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3479the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3480
3481The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows.  It
3482includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3483memory layout:
3484@smallexample
3485INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3486
3487SECTIONS
3488  @{
3489    .text :
3490      @{
3491        *(.text)
3492      @} > REGION_TEXT
3493    .rodata :
3494      @{
3495        *(.rodata)
3496        rodata_end = .;
3497      @} > REGION_RODATA
3498    .data : AT (rodata_end)
3499      @{
3500        data_start = .;
3501        *(.data)
3502      @} > REGION_DATA
3503    data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3504    data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3505    .bss :
3506      @{
3507        *(.bss)
3508      @} > REGION_BSS
3509  @}
3510@end smallexample
3511
3512Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3513regions and alias names.  The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3514variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3515@table @code
3516@item A
3517Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3518@smallexample
3519MEMORY
3520  @{
3521    RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3522  @}
3523
3524REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3525REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3526REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3527REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3528@end smallexample
3529@item B
3530Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}.  Read-write data goes
3531into the @code{RAM}.  An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3532@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3533@smallexample
3534MEMORY
3535  @{
3536    ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3537    RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3538  @}
3539
3540REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3541REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3542REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3543REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3544@end smallexample
3545@item C
3546Program code goes into the @code{ROM}.  Read-only data goes into the
3547@code{ROM2}.  Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}.  An image of the
3548initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3549system start into the @code{RAM}.
3550@smallexample
3551MEMORY
3552  @{
3553    ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3554    ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3555    RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3556  @}
3557
3558REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3559REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3560REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3561REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3562@end smallexample
3563@end table
3564
3565It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3566@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3567necessary:
3568@smallexample
3569#include <string.h>
3570
3571extern char data_start [];
3572extern char data_size [];
3573extern char data_load_start [];
3574
3575void copy_data(void)
3576@{
3577  if (data_start != data_load_start)
3578    @{
3579      memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3580    @}
3581@}
3582@end smallexample
3583
3584@node Miscellaneous Commands
3585@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3586There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3587
3588@table @code
3589@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3590@kindex ASSERT
3591@cindex assertion in linker script
3592Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
3593with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3594
3595Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3596take place.  This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3597inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3598for those symbols.  The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3599symbols that just reference dot.  Thus an assertion like this:
3600
3601@smallexample
3602  .stack :
3603  @{
3604    PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3605    PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3606    ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3607  @}
3608@end smallexample
3609
3610will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere.  Symbols
3611PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3612can be used inside ASSERTions.  Thus:
3613
3614@smallexample
3615  PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3616  .stack :
3617  @{
3618    PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3619    ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3620  @}
3621@end smallexample
3622
3623will work.
3624
3625@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3626@kindex EXTERN
3627@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3628Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3629symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3630modules from standard libraries.  You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3631each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times.  This
3632command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3633
3634@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3635@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3636@cindex common allocation in linker script
3637This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3638to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3639output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3640
3641@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3642@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3643@cindex common allocation in linker script
3644This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3645command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3646to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3647
3648@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3649@kindex INSERT
3650@cindex insert user script into default script
3651This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3652augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays.  It
3653inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3654@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3655default linker script.  The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3656sections.  @xref{Location Counter}.  The insertion happens after the
3657linker has mapped input sections to output sections.  Prior to the
3658insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3659linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3660default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3661of the script.  In particular, input section assignments will be made
3662to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script.  Here
3663is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3664
3665@smallexample
3666SECTIONS
3667@{
3668  OVERLAY :
3669  @{
3670    .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3671    .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3672  @}
3673@}
3674INSERT AFTER .text;
3675@end smallexample
3676
3677@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3678@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3679@cindex cross references
3680This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3681references among certain output sections.
3682
3683In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3684using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3685will not be.  Any direct references between the two sections would be
3686errors.  For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3687a function defined in the other section.
3688
3689The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names.  If
3690@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3691an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
3692@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3693names.
3694
3695@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3696@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3697@cindex cross references
3698This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3699references to one section from a list of other sections.
3700
3701The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3702output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3703a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3704there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3705must never call back.
3706
3707The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3708The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3709If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3710the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3711status.  Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3712names, not input section names.
3713
3714@ifclear SingleFormat
3715@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3716@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3717@cindex machine architecture
3718@cindex architecture
3719Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is one
3720of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}).  You can see the
3721architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3722the @samp{-f} option.
3723@end ifclear
3724
3725@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3726@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3727This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior.  If
3728@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3729in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3730@xref{Expression Section}.
3731@end table
3732
3733@node Assignments
3734@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3735@cindex assignment in scripts
3736@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3737@cindex variables, defining
3738You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
3739the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3740
3741@menu
3742* Simple Assignments::		Simple Assignments
3743* HIDDEN::			HIDDEN
3744* PROVIDE::			PROVIDE
3745* PROVIDE_HIDDEN::		PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3746* Source Code Reference::	How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3747@end menu
3748
3749@node Simple Assignments
3750@subsection Simple Assignments
3751
3752You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3753
3754@table @code
3755@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3756@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3757@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3758@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3759@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3760@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3761@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3762@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3763@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3764@end table
3765
3766The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3767@var{expression}.  In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3768defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3769
3770The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter.  You
3771may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command.  @xref{Location Counter}.
3772
3773The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3774
3775Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3776
3777You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3778statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3779section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3780
3781The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3782expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3783
3784Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3785assignments may be used:
3786
3787@smallexample
3788floating_point = 0;
3789SECTIONS
3790@{
3791  .text :
3792    @{
3793      *(.text)
3794      _etext = .;
3795    @}
3796  _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3797  .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3798@}
3799@end smallexample
3800@noindent
3801In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3802zero.  The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3803the last @samp{.text} input section.  The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3804defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3805upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3806
3807@node HIDDEN
3808@subsection HIDDEN
3809@cindex HIDDEN
3810For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3811exported.  The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3812
3813Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3814@code{HIDDEN}:
3815
3816@smallexample
3817HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3818SECTIONS
3819@{
3820  .text :
3821    @{
3822      *(.text)
3823      HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3824    @}
3825  HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3826  .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3827@}
3828@end smallexample
3829@noindent
3830In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3831
3832@node PROVIDE
3833@subsection PROVIDE
3834@cindex PROVIDE
3835In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3836only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3837the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3838@samp{etext}.  However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3839@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error.  The
3840@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3841@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined.  The syntax is
3842@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3843
3844Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3845@smallexample
3846SECTIONS
3847@{
3848  .text :
3849    @{
3850      *(.text)
3851      _etext = .;
3852      PROVIDE(etext = .);
3853    @}
3854@}
3855@end smallexample
3856
3857In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3858underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
3859the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3860underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3861If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3862linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3863
3864@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3865@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3866@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3867Similar to @code{PROVIDE}.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3868hidden and won't be exported.
3869
3870@node Source Code Reference
3871@subsection Source Code Reference
3872
3873Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3874intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3875a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3876symbol that does not have a value.
3877
3878Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3879transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3880stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3881prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3882mangling}.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3883of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3884variable as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a
3885linker script variable might be referred to as:
3886
3887@smallexample
3888  extern int foo;
3889@end smallexample
3890
3891But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3892
3893@smallexample
3894  _foo = 1000;
3895@end smallexample
3896
3897In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3898transformation has taken place.
3899
3900When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3901things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3902in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol.  The
3903second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3904table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}.  ie the symbol table
3905contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3906value.  So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3907
3908@smallexample
3909  int foo = 1000;
3910@end smallexample
3911
3912creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table.  This entry
3913holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3914number 1000 is initially stored.
3915
3916When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3917first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3918memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3919So:
3920
3921@smallexample
3922  foo = 1;
3923@end smallexample
3924
3925looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3926associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3927address.  Whereas:
3928
3929@smallexample
3930  int * a = & foo;
3931@end smallexample
3932
3933looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3934and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3935the variable @samp{a}.
3936
3937Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3938the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are
3939an address without a value.  So for example the linker script definition:
3940
3941@smallexample
3942  foo = 1000;
3943@end smallexample
3944
3945creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3946the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3947address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3948linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3949access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3950
3951Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3952you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3953use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3954section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3955linker script contains these declarations:
3956
3957@smallexample
3958@group
3959  start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
3960  end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
3961  start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3962@end group
3963@end smallexample
3964
3965Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3966
3967@smallexample
3968@group
3969  extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3970
3971  memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3972@end group
3973@end smallexample
3974
3975Note the use of the @samp{&} operators.  These are correct.
3976Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3977arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3978
3979@smallexample
3980@group
3981  extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3982
3983  memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3984@end group
3985@end smallexample
3986
3987Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3988operators.
3989
3990@node SECTIONS
3991@section SECTIONS Command
3992@kindex SECTIONS
3993The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3994into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3995
3996The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3997@smallexample
3998SECTIONS
3999@{
4000  @var{sections-command}
4001  @var{sections-command}
4002  @dots{}
4003@}
4004@end smallexample
4005
4006Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4007
4008@itemize @bullet
4009@item
4010an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4011@item
4012a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4013@item
4014an output section description
4015@item
4016an overlay description
4017@end itemize
4018
4019The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4020@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4021those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
4022understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4023the layout of the output file.
4024
4025Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4026below.
4027
4028If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4029linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4030section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4031input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4032example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4033in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
4034
4035@menu
4036* Output Section Description::	Output section description
4037* Output Section Name::		Output section name
4038* Output Section Address::	Output section address
4039* Input Section::		Input section description
4040* Output Section Data::		Output section data
4041* Output Section Keywords::	Output section keywords
4042* Output Section Discarding::	Output section discarding
4043* Output Section Attributes::	Output section attributes
4044* Overlay Description::		Overlay description
4045@end menu
4046
4047@node Output Section Description
4048@subsection Output Section Description
4049The full description of an output section looks like this:
4050@smallexample
4051@group
4052@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4053  [AT(@var{lma})]
4054  [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4055  [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4056  [@var{constraint}]
4057  @{
4058    @var{output-section-command}
4059    @var{output-section-command}
4060    @dots{}
4061  @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4062@end group
4063@end smallexample
4064
4065Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4066
4067The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4068name is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4069The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4070the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4071The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4072
4073Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4074
4075@itemize @bullet
4076@item
4077a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4078@item
4079an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4080@item
4081data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4082@item
4083a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4084@end itemize
4085
4086@node Output Section Name
4087@subsection Output Section Name
4088@cindex name, section
4089@cindex section name
4090The name of the output section is @var{section}.  @var{section} must
4091meet the constraints of your output format.  In formats which only
4092support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4093must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4094example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4095output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4096names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4097quoted numeric string.  A section name may consist of any sequence of
4098characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4099commas must be quoted.
4100
4101The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4102Discarding}.
4103
4104@node Output Section Address
4105@subsection Output Section Address
4106@cindex address, section
4107@cindex section address
4108The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4109address) of the output section.  This address is optional, but if it
4110is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4111
4112If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4113section, based on the heuristic below.  This address will be adjusted
4114to fit the alignment requirement of the output section.  The
4115alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4116contained within the output section.
4117
4118The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4119
4120@itemize @bullet
4121@item
4122If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4123is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4124in that region.
4125
4126@item
4127If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4128regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4129section is selected to contain it.  The section's output address will
4130be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4131
4132@item
4133If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4134the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4135counter.
4136@end itemize
4137
4138@noindent
4139For example:
4140
4141@smallexample
4142.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4143@end smallexample
4144
4145@noindent
4146and
4147
4148@smallexample
4149.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4150@end smallexample
4151
4152@noindent
4153are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the
4154@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4155counter.  The second will set it to the current value of the location
4156counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4157input sections.
4158
4159The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4160For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4161so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4162do something like this:
4163@smallexample
4164.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4165@end smallexample
4166@noindent
4167This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4168aligned upward to the specified value.
4169
4170Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4171location counter, provided that the section is non-empty.  (Empty
4172sections are ignored).
4173
4174@node Input Section
4175@subsection Input Section Description
4176@cindex input sections
4177@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4178The most common output section command is an input section description.
4179
4180The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4181You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4182in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4183map the input files into your memory layout.
4184
4185@menu
4186* Input Section Basics::	Input section basics
4187* Input Section Wildcards::	Input section wildcard patterns
4188* Input Section Common::	Input section for common symbols
4189* Input Section Keep::		Input section and garbage collection
4190* Input Section Example::	Input section example
4191@end menu
4192
4193@node Input Section Basics
4194@subsubsection Input Section Basics
4195@cindex input section basics
4196An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4197by a list of section names in parentheses.
4198
4199The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4200describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4201
4202The most common input section description is to include all input
4203sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
4204include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4205@smallexample
4206*(.text)
4207@end smallexample
4208@noindent
4209Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude a list
4210of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4211match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For
4212example:
4213@smallexample
4214*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4215@end smallexample
4216will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4217@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4218
4219There are two ways to include more than one section:
4220@smallexample
4221*(.text .rdata)
4222*(.text) *(.rdata)
4223@end smallexample
4224@noindent
4225The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4226@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
4227first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4228they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all
4229@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4230@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4231
4232You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4233You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4234needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
4235@smallexample
4236data.o(.data)
4237@end smallexample
4238
4239To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4240of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4241
4242Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4243
4244@smallexample
4245@group
4246SECTIONS @{
4247  .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4248  .text2 :  @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4249@}
4250@end group
4251@end smallexample
4252
4253In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4254input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4255@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set.  The output section
4256@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4257whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4258
4259You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4260matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4261with no whitespace around the colon.
4262
4263@table @samp
4264@item archive:file
4265matches file within archive
4266@item archive:
4267matches the whole archive
4268@item :file
4269matches file but not one in an archive
4270@end table
4271
4272Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4273wildcards.  On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4274single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4275@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4276within an archive called @samp{c}.  @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4277also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4278other linker script contexts.  For instance, you cannot extract a file
4279from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4280command.
4281
4282If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4283the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
4284commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
4285@smallexample
4286data.o
4287@end smallexample
4288
4289When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4290and does not contain any wild card
4291characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4292name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command.  If you
4293did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4294though it appeared on the command line.  Note that this differs from an
4295@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4296the archive search path.
4297
4298@node Input Section Wildcards
4299@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4300@cindex input section wildcards
4301@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4302@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4303@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4304In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4305name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4306
4307The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4308pattern for the file name.
4309
4310The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4311
4312@table @samp
4313@item *
4314matches any number of characters
4315@item ?
4316matches any single character
4317@item [@var{chars}]
4318matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4319character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4320@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4321@item \
4322quotes the following character
4323@end table
4324
4325When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4326will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4327Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4328exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4329@samp{/} or not.  In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4330a @samp{/} character.
4331
4332File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4333specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command.  The linker
4334does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4335
4336If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4337appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4338will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
4339sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4340@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4341@smallexample
4342.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4343.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4344@end smallexample
4345
4346@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4347Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4348in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can change
4349this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4350pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}).  When the
4351@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4352into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4353
4354@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4355@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4356difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4357descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4358Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4359reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4360
4361@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4362@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4363difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4364ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4365encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4366
4367@cindex SORT
4368@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4369
4370When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4371can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4372
4373@enumerate
4374@item
4375@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4376It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4377sections have the same name.
4378@item
4379@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4380It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4381sections have the same alignment.
4382@item
4383@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4384treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4385@item
4386@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4387is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4388@item
4389All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4390@end enumerate
4391
4392When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4393section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4394takes precedence over the command line option.
4395
4396If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4397command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4398treated as nested sorting command.
4399
4400@enumerate
4401@item
4402@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4403@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4404@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4405@item
4406@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4407@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4408@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4409@end enumerate
4410
4411If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4412command line option will be ignored.
4413
4414@cindex SORT_NONE
4415@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4416section sorting option.
4417
4418If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4419@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
4420precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4421
4422This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4423files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4424sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4425The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4426with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4427linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4428@smallexample
4429@group
4430SECTIONS @{
4431  .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4432  .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4433  .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4434  .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4435@}
4436@end group
4437@end smallexample
4438
4439@node Input Section Common
4440@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4441@cindex common symbol placement
4442@cindex uninitialized data placement
4443A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4444file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
4445linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4446named @samp{COMMON}.
4447
4448You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4449other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
4450particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4451input files are placed in another section.
4452
4453In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4454@samp{.bss} section in the output file.  For example:
4455@smallexample
4456.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4457@end smallexample
4458
4459@cindex scommon section
4460@cindex small common symbols
4461Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.  For
4462example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4463symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will use a
4464different special section name for other types of common symbols.  In
4465the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4466symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols.  This permits you
4467to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4468locations.
4469
4470@cindex [COMMON]
4471You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts.  This
4472notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to
4473@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4474
4475@node Input Section Keep
4476@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4477@cindex KEEP
4478@cindex garbage collection
4479When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4480it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4481This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4482with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4483@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4484
4485@node Input Section Example
4486@subsubsection Input Section Example
4487The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
4488to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4489start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4490@samp{0x10000}.  All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4491follows immediately, in the same output section.  All of section
4492@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4493@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4494All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4495files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4496
4497@smallexample
4498@group
4499SECTIONS @{
4500  outputa 0x10000 :
4501    @{
4502    all.o
4503    foo.o (.input1)
4504    @}
4505@end group
4506@group
4507  outputb :
4508    @{
4509    foo.o (.input2)
4510    foo1.o (.input1)
4511    @}
4512@end group
4513@group
4514  outputc :
4515    @{
4516    *(.input1)
4517    *(.input2)
4518    @}
4519@}
4520@end group
4521@end smallexample
4522
4523@node Output Section Data
4524@subsection Output Section Data
4525@cindex data
4526@cindex section data
4527@cindex output section data
4528@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4529@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4530@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4531@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4532@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4533You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4534@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4535an output section command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4536parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}).  The
4537value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4538counter.
4539
4540The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4541store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the
4542bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4543stored.
4544
4545For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4546of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4547@smallexample
4548BYTE(1)
4549LONG(addr)
4550@end smallexample
4551
4552When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4553same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and
4554target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case
4555@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4556@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4557
4558If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4559which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4560When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4561true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4562endianness of the first input object file.
4563
4564Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4565between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4566@smallexample
4567SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4568@end smallexample
4569whereas this will work:
4570@smallexample
4571SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4572@end smallexample
4573
4574@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4575@cindex holes, filling
4576@cindex unspecified memory
4577You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4578current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
4579otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4580gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4581with the value of the expression, repeated as
4582necessary.  A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4583point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4584than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4585different parts of an output section.
4586
4587This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4588value @samp{0x90}:
4589@smallexample
4590FILL(0x90909090)
4591@end smallexample
4592
4593The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4594section attribute, but it only affects the
4595part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4596entire section.  If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4597precedence.  @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4598expression.
4599
4600@node Output Section Keywords
4601@subsection Output Section Keywords
4602There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4603commands.
4604
4605@table @code
4606@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4607@cindex input filename symbols
4608@cindex filename symbols
4609@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4610The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4611The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4612file.  The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4613the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4614
4615This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
4616normally used for any other object file format.
4617
4618@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4619@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4620@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4621@item CONSTRUCTORS
4622When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4623unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4624destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
4625arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4626automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4627For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4628linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4629@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears.  The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4630ignored for other object file formats.
4631
4632The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4633constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4634Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4635the start and end of the global destructors.  The
4636first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4637of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word.  The
4638compiler must arrange to actually run the code.  For these object file
4639formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4640@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4641the startup code for @code{main}.  @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4642destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4643@code{exit}.
4644
4645For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4646arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4647addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4648and @code{.dtors} sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
4649linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4650runtime code expects to see.
4651
4652@smallexample
4653      __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4654      LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4655      *(.ctors)
4656      LONG(0)
4657      __CTOR_END__ = .;
4658      __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4659      LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4660      *(.dtors)
4661      LONG(0)
4662      __DTOR_END__ = .;
4663@end smallexample
4664
4665If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4666which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4667are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4668are executed in the correct order.  When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4669command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead.  When using the
4670@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4671@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4672@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4673
4674Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4675and you will not need to concern yourself with them.  However, you may
4676need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4677scripts.
4678
4679@end table
4680
4681@node Output Section Discarding
4682@subsection Output Section Discarding
4683@cindex discarding sections
4684@cindex sections, discarding
4685@cindex removing sections
4686The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4687This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4688may not be present in any of the input files.  For example:
4689@smallexample
4690.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4691@end smallexample
4692@noindent
4693will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4694@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4695sections are not all empty.  Other link script directives that allocate
4696space in an output section will also create the output section.  So
4697too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4698space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4699@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4700@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4701This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4702
4703The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4704on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4705symbols in the output section.  In that case the linker will obey
4706the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4707section is discarded.
4708
4709@cindex /DISCARD/
4710The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4711input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4712section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4713
4714@node Output Section Attributes
4715@subsection Output Section Attributes
4716@cindex output section attributes
4717We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4718like this:
4719
4720@smallexample
4721@group
4722@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4723  [AT(@var{lma})]
4724  [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4725  [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4726  [@var{constraint}]
4727  @{
4728    @var{output-section-command}
4729    @var{output-section-command}
4730    @dots{}
4731  @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4732@end group
4733@end smallexample
4734
4735We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4736@var{output-section-command}.  In this section we will describe the
4737remaining section attributes.
4738
4739@menu
4740* Output Section Type::		Output section type
4741* Output Section LMA::		Output section LMA
4742* Forced Output Alignment::	Forced Output Alignment
4743* Forced Input Alignment::	Forced Input Alignment
4744* Output Section Constraint::   Output section constraint
4745* Output Section Region::	Output section region
4746* Output Section Phdr::		Output section phdr
4747* Output Section Fill::		Output section fill
4748@end menu
4749
4750@node Output Section Type
4751@subsubsection Output Section Type
4752Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
4753parentheses.  The following types are defined:
4754
4755@table @code
4756@item NOLOAD
4757The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4758loaded into memory when the program is run.
4759@item DSECT
4760@itemx COPY
4761@itemx INFO
4762@itemx OVERLAY
4763These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4764rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
4765marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4766section when the program is run.
4767@end table
4768
4769@kindex NOLOAD
4770@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4771@cindex loading, preventing
4772The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4773the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
4774the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the
4775@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4776need to be loaded when the program is run.
4777@smallexample
4778@group
4779SECTIONS @{
4780  ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4781  @dots{}
4782@}
4783@end group
4784@end smallexample
4785
4786@node Output Section LMA
4787@subsubsection Output Section LMA
4788@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4789@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4790@cindex load address
4791@cindex section load address
4792Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4793@ref{Basic Script Concepts}.  The virtual address is specified by the
4794@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier.  The load address is
4795specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords.  Specifying a load
4796address is optional.
4797
4798The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument.  This
4799specifies the exact load address of the section.  The @code{AT>} keyword
4800takes the name of a memory region as an argument.  @xref{MEMORY}.  The
4801load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4802region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4803
4804If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4805section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4806load address:
4807
4808@itemize @bullet
4809@item
4810If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4811the LMA address as well.
4812
4813@item
4814If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4815
4816@item
4817Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4818with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4819section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4820VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4821the last section in the located region.
4822
4823@item
4824If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4825that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4826
4827@item
4828If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4829section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4830@end itemize
4831
4832@cindex ROM initialized data
4833@cindex initialized data in ROM
4834This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
4835example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4836called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4837@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4838even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4839uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}.  The symbol @code{_data} is
4840defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4841counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4842
4843@smallexample
4844@group
4845SECTIONS
4846  @{
4847  .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4848  .mdata 0x2000 :
4849    AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4850    @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  @}
4851  .bss 0x3000 :
4852    @{ _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4853@}
4854@end group
4855@end smallexample
4856
4857The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4858this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4859the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.  Notice
4860how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4861script.
4862
4863@smallexample
4864@group
4865extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4866char *src = &_etext;
4867char *dst = &_data;
4868
4869/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it.  */
4870while (dst < &_edata)
4871  *dst++ = *src++;
4872
4873/* Zero bss.  */
4874for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4875  *dst = 0;
4876@end group
4877@end smallexample
4878
4879@node Forced Output Alignment
4880@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4881@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4882@cindex forcing output section alignment
4883@cindex output section alignment
4884You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.  As an
4885alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4886intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4887
4888@node Forced Input Alignment
4889@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4890@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4891@cindex forcing input section alignment
4892@cindex input section alignment
4893You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4894SUBALIGN.  The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4895sections, whether larger or smaller.
4896
4897@node Output Section Constraint
4898@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4899@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4900@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4901@cindex constraints on output sections
4902You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4903of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4904read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4905@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4906
4907@node Output Section Region
4908@subsubsection Output Section Region
4909@kindex >@var{region}
4910@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4911@cindex memory regions and sections
4912You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4913using @samp{>@var{region}}.  @xref{MEMORY}.
4914
4915Here is a simple example:
4916@smallexample
4917@group
4918MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4919SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4920@end group
4921@end smallexample
4922
4923@node Output Section Phdr
4924@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4925@kindex :@var{phdr}
4926@cindex section, assigning to program header
4927@cindex program headers and sections
4928You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4929using @samp{:@var{phdr}}.  @xref{PHDRS}.  If a section is assigned to
4930one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4931assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4932@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier.  You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4933linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4934
4935Here is a simple example:
4936@smallexample
4937@group
4938PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4939SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4940@end group
4941@end smallexample
4942
4943@node Output Section Fill
4944@subsubsection Output Section Fill
4945@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4946@cindex section fill pattern
4947@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4948You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4949@samp{=@var{fillexp}}.  @var{fillexp} is an expression
4950(@pxref{Expressions}).  Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4951within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4952alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4953necessary.  If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4954of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4955an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4956fill pattern;  Leading zeros become part of the pattern too.  For all
4957other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4958pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4959expression.  In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4960
4961You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4962output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4963
4964Here is a simple example:
4965@smallexample
4966@group
4967SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4968@end group
4969@end smallexample
4970
4971@node Overlay Description
4972@subsection Overlay Description
4973@kindex OVERLAY
4974@cindex overlays
4975An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4976are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4977the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4978copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4979required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
4980can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4981than another.
4982
4983Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command.  The
4984@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4985output section description.  The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4986command is as follows:
4987@smallexample
4988@group
4989OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4990  @{
4991    @var{secname1}
4992      @{
4993        @var{output-section-command}
4994        @var{output-section-command}
4995        @dots{}
4996      @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4997    @var{secname2}
4998      @{
4999        @var{output-section-command}
5000        @var{output-section-command}
5001        @dots{}
5002      @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5003    @dots{}
5004  @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5005@end group
5006@end smallexample
5007
5008Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5009section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above).  The
5010section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5011those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5012except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5013sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5014
5015The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5016the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5017
5018The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The load
5019addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5020memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5021whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5022and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5023and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5024
5025If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5026references among the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since
5027the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5028sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5029@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5030
5031For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5032provides two symbols.  The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5033defined as the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
5034@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5035the section.  Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5036within C identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these
5037symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5038
5039At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5040the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5041
5042Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
5043@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5044@smallexample
5045@group
5046  OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5047   @{
5048     .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5049     .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5050   @}
5051@end group
5052@end smallexample
5053@noindent
5054This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5055address 0x1000.  @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5056@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}.  The
5057following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5058@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5059@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5060
5061C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5062like the following.
5063
5064@smallexample
5065@group
5066  extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5067  memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5068          &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5069@end group
5070@end smallexample
5071
5072Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5073everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
5074example could have been written identically as follows.
5075
5076@smallexample
5077@group
5078  .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5079  PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5080  PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5081  .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5082  PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5083  PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5084  . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5085@end group
5086@end smallexample
5087
5088@node MEMORY
5089@section MEMORY Command
5090@kindex MEMORY
5091@cindex memory regions
5092@cindex regions of memory
5093@cindex allocating memory
5094@cindex discontinuous memory
5095The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5096memory.  You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5097
5098The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5099memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
5100may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
5101can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
5102set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5103regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
5104around to fit into the available regions.
5105
5106A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5107however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5108specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command.  The syntax for
5109@code{MEMORY} is:
5110@smallexample
5111@group
5112MEMORY
5113  @{
5114    @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5115    @dots{}
5116  @}
5117@end group
5118@end smallexample
5119
5120The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5121region.  The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5122Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5123with symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region
5124must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command.  However you can
5125add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5126command.
5127
5128@cindex memory region attributes
5129The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5130whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5131not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in
5132@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5133section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5134the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5135them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5136
5137The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5138@table @samp
5139@item R
5140Read-only section
5141@item W
5142Read/write section
5143@item X
5144Executable section
5145@item A
5146Allocatable section
5147@item I
5148Initialized section
5149@item L
5150Same as @samp{I}
5151@item !
5152Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5153@end table
5154
5155If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5156@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region.  The @samp{!}
5157attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5158in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5159attributes.
5160
5161@kindex ORIGIN =
5162@kindex o =
5163@kindex org =
5164The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5165the memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5166cannot involve any symbols.  The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5167abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5168@code{ORG}).
5169
5170@kindex LENGTH =
5171@kindex len =
5172@kindex l =
5173The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5174region.  As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5175be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword
5176@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5177
5178In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5179available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5180and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes.  The
5181linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5182is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5183or executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
5184explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5185region.
5186
5187@smallexample
5188@group
5189MEMORY
5190  @{
5191    rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5192    ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5193  @}
5194@end group
5195@end smallexample
5196
5197Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5198specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5199@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute.  For example, if you have
5200a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5201output section definition.  @xref{Output Section Region}.  If no address
5202was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5203the next available address within the memory region.  If the combined
5204output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5205region, the linker will issue an error message.
5206
5207It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5208expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5209@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5210
5211@smallexample
5212@group
5213  _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5214@end group
5215@end smallexample
5216
5217@node PHDRS
5218@section PHDRS Command
5219@kindex PHDRS
5220@cindex program headers
5221@cindex ELF program headers
5222@cindex program segments
5223@cindex segments, ELF
5224The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5225@dfn{segments}.  The program headers describe how the program should be
5226loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5227program with the @samp{-p} option.
5228
5229When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5230reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5231program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5232This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5233interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5234
5235The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.  However,
5236in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5237precisely.  You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose.  When
5238the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5239not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5240
5241The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5242generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
5243ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5244
5245This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command.  The words @code{PHDRS},
5246@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5247
5248@smallexample
5249@group
5250PHDRS
5251@{
5252  @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5253        [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5254@}
5255@end group
5256@end smallexample
5257
5258The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5259of the linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program
5260header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5261with symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header
5262must have a distinct name.  The headers are processed in order and it
5263is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5264
5265Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5266system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
5267specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5268sections in the segments.  You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5269attribute to place a section in a particular segment.  @xref{Output
5270Section Phdr}.
5271
5272It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
5273merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
5274repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5275contain the section.
5276
5277If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5278then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5279not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments.  This is for
5280convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5281placed in a single segment.  You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5282default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5283segment at all.
5284
5285@kindex FILEHDR
5286@kindex PHDRS
5287You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5288the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5289The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5290file header.  The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5291include the ELF program headers themselves.  If applied to a loadable
5292segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5293these keywords.
5294
5295The @var{type} may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
5296value of the keyword.
5297
5298@table @asis
5299@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5300Indicates an unused program header.
5301
5302@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5303Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5304the file.
5305
5306@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5307Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5308
5309@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5310Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5311found.
5312
5313@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5314Indicates a segment holding note information.
5315
5316@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5317A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5318ABI.
5319
5320@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5321Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5322
5323@item @var{expression}
5324An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This may
5325be used for types not defined above.
5326@end table
5327
5328You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5329in memory by using an @code{AT} expression.  This is identical to the
5330@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5331Section LMA}).  The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5332output section attribute.
5333
5334The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5335which comprise the segment.  You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5336explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of @var{flags} must be
5337an integer.  It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5338header.
5339
5340Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}.  This shows a typical set of program
5341headers used on a native ELF system.
5342
5343@example
5344@group
5345PHDRS
5346@{
5347  headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5348  interp PT_INTERP ;
5349  text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5350  data PT_LOAD ;
5351  dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5352@}
5353
5354SECTIONS
5355@{
5356  . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5357  .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5358  .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5359  .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5360  @dots{}
5361  . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5362  .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5363  .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5364  @dots{}
5365@}
5366@end group
5367@end example
5368
5369@node VERSION
5370@section VERSION Command
5371@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5372@cindex symbol versions
5373@cindex version script
5374@cindex versions of symbols
5375The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
5376only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
5377symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5378a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5379shared library.
5380
5381You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5382you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You can
5383also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5384
5385The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5386@smallexample
5387VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5388@end smallexample
5389
5390The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5391Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
5392version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5393version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5394version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5395scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5396library.
5397
5398The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5399examples.
5400
5401@smallexample
5402VERS_1.1 @{
5403	 global:
5404		 foo1;
5405	 local:
5406		 old*;
5407		 original*;
5408		 new*;
5409@};
5410
5411VERS_1.2 @{
5412		 foo2;
5413@} VERS_1.1;
5414
5415VERS_2.0 @{
5416		 bar1; bar2;
5417	 extern "C++" @{
5418		 ns::*;
5419		 "f(int, double)";
5420	 @};
5421@} VERS_1.2;
5422@end smallexample
5423
5424This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
5425version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5426The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}.  It reduces
5427a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5428of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5429symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5430is matched.  The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5431in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5432However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5433name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5434
5435Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}.  This node
5436depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}.  The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5437to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5438
5439Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}.  This node
5440depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}.  The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5441and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5442
5443When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5444specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5445unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
5446unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5447somewhere in the version script.  Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5448wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node.  Global
5449wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5450set exported for an old version.  That's wrong since older versions
5451ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5452
5453The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5454they might suggest to the person reading them.  The @samp{2.0} version
5455could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5456However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5457
5458Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5459in the version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5460symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5461won't.
5462
5463@smallexample
5464@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5465@end smallexample
5466
5467When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5468symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5469requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5470shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5471loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5472linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5473application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
5474way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5475all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5476search for each symbol reference.
5477
5478The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5479doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
5480that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5481functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5482the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
5483required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5484that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
5485versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5486the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5487
5488There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
5489first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5490source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5491script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5492maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
5493@smallexample
5494__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5495@end smallexample
5496@noindent
5497in the C source file.  This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5498be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5499The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5500@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5501takes precedence over a version script.
5502
5503The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5504function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
5505an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5506version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5507linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5508
5509To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5510source file.  Here is an example:
5511
5512@smallexample
5513__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5514__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5515__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5516__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5517@end smallexample
5518
5519In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5520unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains this
5521example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5522@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5523
5524When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5525some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5526this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the
5527@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive.  You can only
5528declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5529you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5530
5531If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5532within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5533(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5534specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5535
5536You can also specify the language in the version script:
5537
5538@smallexample
5539VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5540@end smallexample
5541
5542The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5543The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5544demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5545patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.  The default
5546@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5547
5548Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
5549described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5550or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In
5551the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5552whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5553cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler
5554might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5555should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5556expect when you upgrade.
5557
5558@node Expressions
5559@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5560@cindex expressions
5561@cindex arithmetic
5562The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5563that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
5564expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5565host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5566
5567You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5568
5569The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5570expressions.
5571
5572@menu
5573* Constants::			Constants
5574* Symbolic Constants::          Symbolic constants
5575* Symbols::			Symbol Names
5576* Orphan Sections::		Orphan Sections
5577* Location Counter::		The Location Counter
5578* Operators::			Operators
5579* Evaluation::			Evaluation
5580* Expression Section::		The Section of an Expression
5581* Builtin Functions::		Builtin Functions
5582@end menu
5583
5584@node Constants
5585@subsection Constants
5586@cindex integer notation
5587@cindex constants in linker scripts
5588All constants are integers.
5589
5590As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5591octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5592hexadecimal.  Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5593@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5594@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal.  Any integer
5595value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5596
5597@cindex scaled integers
5598@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5599@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5600@cindex suffixes for integers
5601@cindex integer suffixes
5602In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5603constant by
5604@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5605@ifnottex
5606@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5607@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5608@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5609@end ifnottex
5610@tex
5611${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5612@end tex
5613@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5614respectively.  For example, the following
5615all refer to the same quantity:
5616
5617@smallexample
5618_fourk_1 = 4K;
5619_fourk_2 = 4096;
5620_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5621_fourk_4 = 10000o;
5622@end smallexample
5623
5624Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5625conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5626
5627@node Symbolic Constants
5628@subsection Symbolic Constants
5629@cindex symbolic constants
5630@kindex CONSTANT
5631It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5632the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5633
5634@table @code
5635@item MAXPAGESIZE
5636@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5637The target's maximum page size.
5638
5639@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5640@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5641The target's default page size.
5642@end table
5643
5644So for example:
5645
5646@smallexample
5647  .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5648@end smallexample
5649
5650will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5651supported by the target.
5652
5653@node Symbols
5654@subsection Symbol Names
5655@cindex symbol names
5656@cindex names
5657@cindex quoted symbol names
5658@kindex "
5659Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5660and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5661Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
5662specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5663keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5664@smallexample
5665"SECTION" = 9;
5666"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5667@end smallexample
5668
5669Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5670to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5671whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5672
5673@node Orphan Sections
5674@subsection Orphan Sections
5675@cindex orphan
5676Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5677are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5678script.  The linker will still copy these sections into the
5679output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5680placed.  The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this.  It
5681attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5682same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5683If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5684at the end of the file.
5685
5686For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5687well as section flag.
5688
5689The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5690(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5691output sections an orphan is placed in.
5692
5693If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5694the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5695__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5696section.  These indicate the start address and end address of the
5697orphaned section respectively.  Note: most section names are not
5698representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5699character.
5700
5701@node Location Counter
5702@subsection The Location Counter
5703@kindex .
5704@cindex dot
5705@cindex location counter
5706@cindex current output location
5707The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5708current output location counter.  Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5709location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5710within a @code{SECTIONS} command.  The @code{.} symbol may appear
5711anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5712
5713@cindex holes
5714Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5715moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
5716location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5717and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5718doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5719
5720@smallexample
5721SECTIONS
5722@{
5723  output :
5724    @{
5725      file1(.text)
5726      . = . + 1000;
5727      file2(.text)
5728      . += 1000;
5729      file3(.text)
5730    @} = 0x12345678;
5731@}
5732@end smallexample
5733@noindent
5734In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5735located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}.  It is
5736followed by a 1000 byte gap.  Then the @samp{.text} section from
5737@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5738@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}.  The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5739specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5740
5741@cindex dot inside sections
5742Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5743current containing object.  Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5744statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5745absolute address.  If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5746however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5747not an absolute address.  Thus in a script like this:
5748
5749@smallexample
5750SECTIONS
5751@{
5752    . = 0x100
5753    .text: @{
5754      *(.text)
5755      . = 0x200
5756    @}
5757    . = 0x500
5758    .data: @{
5759      *(.data)
5760      . += 0x600
5761    @}
5762@}
5763@end smallexample
5764
5765The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5766and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5767the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too
5768much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5769move @code{.} backwards).  The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5770and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5771the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5772the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5773
5774@cindex dot outside sections
5775Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5776output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5777needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
5778
5779@smallexample
5780SECTIONS
5781@{
5782    start_of_text = . ;
5783    .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5784    end_of_text = . ;
5785
5786    start_of_data = . ;
5787    .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5788    end_of_data = . ;
5789@}
5790@end smallexample
5791
5792If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5793not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5794between @code{.text} and @code{.data}.  You might think the linker
5795should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5796blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker.  As well,
5797the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5798sections.  Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5799statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5800special case of an assignment to @code{.}.  I.e., the linker will
5801place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5802as follows:
5803
5804@smallexample
5805SECTIONS
5806@{
5807    start_of_text = . ;
5808    .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5809    end_of_text = . ;
5810
5811    start_of_data = . ;
5812    .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5813    .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5814    end_of_data = . ;
5815@}
5816@end smallexample
5817
5818This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5819@code{start_of_data}.  One way to influence the orphan section
5820placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5821assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5822a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5823section.  So you could write:
5824
5825@smallexample
5826SECTIONS
5827@{
5828    start_of_text = . ;
5829    .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5830    end_of_text = . ;
5831
5832    . = . ;
5833    start_of_data = . ;
5834    .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5835    end_of_data = . ;
5836@}
5837@end smallexample
5838
5839Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5840@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5841
5842@need 2000
5843@node Operators
5844@subsection Operators
5845@cindex operators for arithmetic
5846@cindex arithmetic operators
5847@cindex precedence in expressions
5848The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5849the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5850@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5851@ifnottex
5852@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5853@smallexample
5854precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
5855(highest)
58561               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
58572               left            *  /  %
58583               left            +  -
58594               left            >>  <<
58605               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
58616               left            &
58627               left            |
58638               left            &&
58649               left            ||
586510              right           ? :
586611              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
5867(lowest)
5868@end smallexample
5869Notes:
5870(1) Prefix operators
5871(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5872@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5873@end ifnottex
5874@tex
5875\vskip \baselineskip
5876%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5877\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5878\hrule
5879\halign
5880{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5881height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5882&Precedence&&  Associativity  &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5883height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5884\noalign{\hrule}
5885height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5886&highest&&&&&\cr
5887% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5888&1&&left&&\qquad-          \char'176\      !\qquad\dag&\cr
5889&2&&left&&*          /        \%&\cr
5890&3&&left&&+          -&\cr
5891&4&&left&&>>         <<&\cr
5892&5&&left&&==         !=       >      <      <=      >=&\cr
5893&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5894&7&&left&&|&\cr
5895&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5896&9&&left&&||&\cr
5897&10&&right&&?        :&\cr
5898&11&&right&&\qquad\&=      +=       -=     *=     /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5899&lowest&&&&&\cr
5900height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5901\hrule}
5902@end tex
5903@iftex
5904{
5905@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5906@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5907@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5908}
5909@end iftex
5910@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5911
5912@node Evaluation
5913@subsection Evaluation
5914@cindex lazy evaluation
5915@cindex expression evaluation order
5916The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
5917an expression when absolutely necessary.
5918
5919The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5920address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5921regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
5922as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5923
5924However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5925until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
5926other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5927for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5928
5929The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5930assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5931allocation.
5932
5933Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5934@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5935
5936If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5937available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
5938following
5939@smallexample
5940@group
5941SECTIONS
5942  @{
5943    .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5944      @{ *(.text) @}
5945  @}
5946@end group
5947@end smallexample
5948@noindent
5949will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5950address}.
5951
5952@node Expression Section
5953@subsection The Section of an Expression
5954@cindex expression sections
5955@cindex absolute expressions
5956@cindex relative expressions
5957@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5958@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5959@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5960Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute.  A section
5961relative symbol is relocatable.  If you request relocatable output
5962using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5963value of a section relative symbol.  On the other hand, an absolute
5964symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5965operations.
5966
5967Some terms in linker expressions are addresses.  This is true of
5968section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5969address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5970@code{SEGMENT_START}.  Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5971functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5972One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5973(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5974differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5975versions of @code{ld}.  Expressions appearing outside an output
5976section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5977Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5978absolute symbols as numbers.  If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5979given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5980everywhere.
5981
5982In the following simple example,
5983
5984@smallexample
5985@group
5986SECTIONS
5987  @{
5988    . = 0x100;
5989    __executable_start = 0x100;
5990    .data :
5991    @{
5992      . = 0x10;
5993      __data_start = 0x10;
5994      *(.data)
5995    @}
5996    @dots{}
5997  @}
5998@end group
5999@end smallexample
6000
6001both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6002address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6003@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6004section in the second two assignments.
6005
6006For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6007addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6008
6009@itemize @bullet
6010@item
6011Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6012operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6013absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6014@item
6015Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6016relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6017and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6018@item
6019Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6020in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6021address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6022before applying the operator.
6023@end itemize
6024
6025The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6026
6027@itemize @bullet
6028@item
6029An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6030@item
6031The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6032@item
6033The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6034relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6035(after above conversions) is also a number.
6036@item
6037The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6038relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6039section as the relative operand(s).
6040@item
6041The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6042conversions) is an absolute address.
6043@end itemize
6044
6045You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6046to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
6047create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6048section @samp{.data}:
6049@smallexample
6050SECTIONS
6051  @{
6052    .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6053  @}
6054@end smallexample
6055@noindent
6056If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6057@samp{.data} section.
6058
6059Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6060particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6061
6062@node Builtin Functions
6063@subsection Builtin Functions
6064@cindex functions in expressions
6065The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6066use in linker script expressions.
6067
6068@table @code
6069@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6070@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6071@cindex expression, absolute
6072Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6073of the expression @var{exp}.  Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6074value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6075normally section relative.  @xref{Expression Section}.
6076
6077@item ADDR(@var{section})
6078@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6079@cindex section address in expression
6080Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}.  Your
6081script must previously have defined the location of that section.  In
6082the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6083@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6084@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6085the other two will be absolute:
6086@smallexample
6087@group
6088SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6089  .output1 :
6090    @{
6091    start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6092    @dots{}
6093    @}
6094  .output :
6095    @{
6096    symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6097    symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6098    @}
6099@dots{} @}
6100@end group
6101@end smallexample
6102
6103@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6104@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6105@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6106@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6107@cindex round up location counter
6108@cindex align location counter
6109@cindex round up expression
6110@cindex align expression
6111Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6112to the next @var{align} boundary.  The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6113doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6114arithmetic on it.  The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6115expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6116equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6117
6118Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6119next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6120variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6121input sections:
6122@smallexample
6123@group
6124SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6125  .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6126    *(.data)
6127    variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6128  @}
6129@dots{} @}
6130@end group
6131@end smallexample
6132@noindent
6133The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6134a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6135a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}).  The second use
6136of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6137
6138The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6139
6140@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6141@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6142@cindex section alignment
6143Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6144been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
6145evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6146the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6147value in that section.
6148@smallexample
6149@group
6150SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6151  .output @{
6152    LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6153    @dots{}
6154    @}
6155@dots{} @}
6156@end group
6157@end smallexample
6158
6159@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6160@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6161This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6162scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6163section.
6164
6165@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6166@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6167This is equivalent to either
6168@smallexample
6169(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6170@end smallexample
6171or
6172@smallexample
6173(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6174 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6175@end smallexample
6176@noindent
6177depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6178for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6179@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6180If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6181memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6182bytes in the on-disk file.
6183
6184This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6185any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6186@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6187be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6188working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6189
6190@noindent
6191Example:
6192@smallexample
6193  . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6194@end smallexample
6195
6196@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6197@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6198This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6199evaluation purposes.
6200
6201@smallexample
6202  . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6203@end smallexample
6204
6205@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6206@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6207This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6208@samp{-z relro} option is used.
6209When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6210does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6211@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6212boundary for particular target.  If present in the linker script,
6213it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6214@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.  Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6215padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6216section alignment.
6217
6218@smallexample
6219  . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6220@end smallexample
6221
6222@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6223@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6224@cindex symbol defaults
6225Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6226defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6227return 0.  You can use this function to provide
6228default values for symbols.  For example, the following script fragment
6229shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6230the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6231existed, its value is preserved:
6232
6233@smallexample
6234@group
6235SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6236  .text : @{
6237    begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6238    @dots{}
6239  @}
6240  @dots{}
6241@}
6242@end group
6243@end smallexample
6244
6245@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6246@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6247Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6248
6249@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6250@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6251@cindex section load address in expression
6252Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}.  (@pxref{Output
6253Section LMA}).
6254
6255@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6256@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6257Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6258@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6259
6260@kindex MAX
6261@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6262Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6263
6264@kindex MIN
6265@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6266Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6267
6268@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6269@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6270@cindex unallocated address, next
6271Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6272This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6273use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6274output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6275
6276@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6277@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6278Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6279
6280@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6281@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6282Return the base address of the named @var{segment}.  If an explicit
6283value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6284@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6285will be @var{default}.  At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6286can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6287``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6288name.
6289
6290@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6291@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6292@cindex section size
6293Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6294been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
6295evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following example,
6296@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6297@smallexample
6298@group
6299SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6300  .output @{
6301    .start = . ;
6302    @dots{}
6303    .end = . ;
6304    @}
6305  symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6306  symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6307@dots{} @}
6308@end group
6309@end smallexample
6310
6311@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6312@itemx sizeof_headers
6313@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6314@cindex header size
6315Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
6316information which appears at the start of the output file.  You can use
6317this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6318choose, to facilitate paging.
6319
6320@cindex not enough room for program headers
6321@cindex program headers, not enough room
6322When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6323@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6324number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6325addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
6326additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6327room for program headers}.  To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6328the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6329script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6330you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6331command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6332@end table
6333
6334@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6335@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6336@cindex implicit linker scripts
6337If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6338an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6339linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6340linker will report an error.
6341
6342An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6343
6344Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6345assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6346commands.
6347
6348Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6349at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6350read.  This can affect archive searching.
6351
6352@ifset GENERIC
6353@node Machine Dependent
6354@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6355
6356@cindex machine dependencies
6357@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6358sections describe them.  Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6359functionality are not listed.
6360
6361@menu
6362@ifset H8300
6363* H8/300::                      @command{ld} and the H8/300
6364@end ifset
6365@ifset I960
6366* i960::                        @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6367@end ifset
6368@ifset M68HC11
6369* M68HC11/68HC12::		@code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6370@end ifset
6371@ifset ARM
6372* ARM::				@command{ld} and the ARM family
6373@end ifset
6374@ifset HPPA
6375* HPPA ELF32::                  @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6376@end ifset
6377@ifset M68K
6378* M68K::			@command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6379@end ifset
6380@ifset MIPS
6381* MIPS::			@command{ld} and the MIPS family
6382@end ifset
6383@ifset MMIX
6384* MMIX::			@command{ld} and MMIX
6385@end ifset
6386@ifset MSP430
6387* MSP430::			@command{ld} and MSP430
6388@end ifset
6389@ifset NDS32
6390* NDS32::			@command{ld} and NDS32
6391@end ifset
6392@ifset NIOSII
6393* Nios II::			@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6394@end ifset
6395@ifset POWERPC
6396* PowerPC ELF32::		@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6397@end ifset
6398@ifset POWERPC64
6399* PowerPC64 ELF64::		@command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6400@end ifset
6401@ifset SPU
6402* SPU ELF::			@command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6403@end ifset
6404@ifset TICOFF
6405* TI COFF::                     @command{ld} and TI COFF
6406@end ifset
6407@ifset WIN32
6408* WIN32::                       @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6409@end ifset
6410@ifset XTENSA
6411* Xtensa::                      @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6412@end ifset
6413@end menu
6414@end ifset
6415
6416@ifset H8300
6417@ifclear GENERIC
6418@raisesections
6419@end ifclear
6420
6421@node H8/300
6422@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6423
6424@cindex H8/300 support
6425For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6426you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6427
6428@table @emph
6429@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6430@item relaxing address modes
6431@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6432targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6433program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6434respectively.
6435
6436@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6437@item synthesizing instructions
6438@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6439@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6440sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6441page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6442(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6443@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6444top page of memory).
6445
6446@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6447indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6448displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6449the 16-bit displacement form.  (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6450@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6451whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6452range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6453
6454@item bit manipulation instructions
6455@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6456biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6457which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6458page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6459(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6460@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6461the top page of memory).
6462
6463@item system control instructions
6464@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
646532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6466changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6467(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6468@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6469the top page of memory).
6470@end table
6471
6472@ifclear GENERIC
6473@lowersections
6474@end ifclear
6475@end ifset
6476
6477@ifclear GENERIC
6478@ifset Renesas
6479@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6480@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6481@node Renesas
6482@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6483
6484@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6485H8/500, and SH chips.  No special features, commands, or command-line
6486options are required for these chips.
6487@end ifset
6488@end ifclear
6489
6490@ifset I960
6491@ifclear GENERIC
6492@raisesections
6493@end ifclear
6494
6495@node i960
6496@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6497
6498@cindex i960 support
6499
6500You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6501specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6502family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6503incompatible instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the
6504linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6505libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6506search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6507
6508For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6509well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6510paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6511the names
6512
6513@smallexample
6514@group
6515try
6516libtry.a
6517tryca
6518libtryca.a
6519@end group
6520@end smallexample
6521
6522@noindent
6523The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6524two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6525
6526You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6527the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6528use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6529specifies a library.
6530
6531@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6532@cindex relaxing on i960
6533@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family.  If
6534you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6535@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6536them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6537instructions, respectively.  @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6538instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6539target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6540not itself call any subroutines).
6541
6542@ifclear GENERIC
6543@lowersections
6544@end ifclear
6545@end ifset
6546
6547@ifset ARM
6548@ifclear GENERIC
6549@raisesections
6550@end ifclear
6551
6552@ifset M68HC11
6553@ifclear GENERIC
6554@raisesections
6555@end ifclear
6556
6557@node M68HC11/68HC12
6558@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6559
6560@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6561
6562@subsection Linker Relaxation
6563
6564For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6565optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6566
6567@table @emph
6568@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6569@item relaxing address modes
6570@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6571targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6572program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6573respectively.
6574
6575@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6576transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6577page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6578
6579@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6580When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6581of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6582addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6583@code{bset} instructions.
6584
6585@end table
6586
6587@subsection Trampoline Generation
6588
6589@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6590@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6591For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6592call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6593will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6594trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6595case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6596point to the function trampoline.
6597
6598@ifclear GENERIC
6599@lowersections
6600@end ifclear
6601@end ifset
6602
6603@node ARM
6604@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6605
6606@cindex ARM interworking support
6607@kindex --support-old-code
6608For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6609between ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
6610been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6611line option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6612libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6613option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6614given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
6615which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
6616the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6617non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6618
6619@cindex thumb entry point
6620@cindex entry point, thumb
6621@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6622The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6623@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6624But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6625branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6626executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6627
6628@cindex PE import table prefixing
6629@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6630The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6631the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6632element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6633import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6634
6635@cindex BE8
6636@kindex --be8
6637The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6638executables.  This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6639objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6640option.  The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6641little-endian code.
6642
6643@cindex TARGET1
6644@kindex --target1-rel
6645@kindex --target1-abs
6646The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6647@samp{.init_array} section.  It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6648or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target.  The @samp{--target1-rel}
6649and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6650
6651@cindex TARGET2
6652@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6653The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6654@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation.  Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6655meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6656@table @samp
6657@item rel
6658@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6659@item abs
6660@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6661@item got-rel
6662@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6663@end table
6664
6665@cindex FIX_V4BX
6666@kindex --fix-v4bx
6667The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6668specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6669interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6670also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6671
6672In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6673linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6674@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6675
6676In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6677relocations are ignored.
6678
6679@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6680@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6681Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6682relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6683
6684@smallexample
6685TST rM, #1
6686MOVEQ PC, rM
6687BX Rn
6688@end smallexample
6689
6690This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6691and are still interworking safe.  Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6692condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6693
6694@cindex USE_BLX
6695@kindex --use-blx
6696The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6697BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6698situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6699code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6700each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6701
6702This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6703specify it if you are using that target.
6704
6705@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6706@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6707The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6708bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6709instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6710to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6711the support code can read the intended values.
6712
6713The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6714intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6715and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6716intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6717full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6718you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6719
6720If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6721enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6722@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6723mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6724vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6725@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6726
6727If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6728potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6729such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6730first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6731instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6732the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6733are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6734
6735@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6736@kindex --fix-arm1176
6737@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6738The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6739in certain ARM1176 processors.  The workaround is enabled by default if you
6740are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier.  It can be disabled
6741unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6742
6743Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6744Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6745http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6746
6747@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6748@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6749
6750The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6751workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6752the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx).  When accessing
6753off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6754the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort.  These are only
6755core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6756integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6757VPOP.  Stores are not affected.
6758
6759The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6760necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6761
6762The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6763@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}.  If you know you are using buggy
6764STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6765linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6766@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6767
6768If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6769potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6770such sequence which may trigger the erratum.  The veneer consists in a
6771replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6772branch back to the subsequent instruction.  The original instruction is
6773then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6774
6775The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6776the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6777
6778The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6779they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6780there.  In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6781occurs.
6782
6783The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6784PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6785large.  In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6786cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6787occurs.
6788
6789@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6790@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6791The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6792warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6793enumeration size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled,
6794linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6795using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6796not be diagnosed.
6797
6798@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6799@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6800The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6801warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6802@code{wchar_t} size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled,
6803linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6804using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6805
6806@cindex PIC_VENEER
6807@kindex --pic-veneer
6808The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6809ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6810is not PIC.  This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6811@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6812
6813@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6814@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6815The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6816code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6817perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away.  The
6818placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6819controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6820The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6821duplicate stubs, increasing the code size.  The linker will try to
6822group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6823code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6824where they should be placed.
6825
6826The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6827@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6828placed.  If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6829branch that needs them.  If it is positive then the stubs can be
6830placed either before or after the branches that need them.  If the
6831value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6832exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6833A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6834linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6835from the input sections.
6836
6837The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6838@samp{N = +1}.
6839
6840Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6841only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6842otherwise.
6843
6844@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6845@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6846@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6847The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors.  The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile.  It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6848
6849The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code.  Please contact ARM for further details.
6850
6851@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6852@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6853@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6854The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors.  The workaround is disabled by default.  It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6855
6856Please contact ARM for further details.
6857
6858@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6859@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6860@cindex Merging exidx entries
6861The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6862
6863@kindex --long-plt
6864@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6865The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6866which support up to 4Gb of code.  The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6867entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6868
6869@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6870@cindex AArch64 rela addend
6871The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6872link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6873
6874@ifclear GENERIC
6875@lowersections
6876@end ifclear
6877@end ifset
6878
6879@ifset HPPA
6880@ifclear GENERIC
6881@raisesections
6882@end ifclear
6883
6884@node HPPA ELF32
6885@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6886@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6887@kindex --multi-subspace
6888When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6889import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6890The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6891stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6892multiple sub-spaces.
6893
6894@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6895@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6896Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6897stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6898@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6899sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed,
6900a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6901the stub section, and one group after it.  However, when using
6902conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6903prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6904A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6905branches to stubs always use a negative offset.  Two special values of
6906@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}.  These both instruct
6907@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6908detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6909positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6910
6911Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections.  A
6912single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6913create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
6914large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6915
6916@ifclear GENERIC
6917@lowersections
6918@end ifclear
6919@end ifset
6920
6921@ifset M68K
6922@ifclear GENERIC
6923@raisesections
6924@end ifclear
6925
6926@node M68K
6927@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6928
6929@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6930@kindex --got=@var{type}
6931The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6932The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6933@samp{target}.  When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6934the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6935@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6936entries only at non-negative offsets.
6937@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6938entries at both negative and positive offsets.  Not all environments
6939support such GOTs.
6940@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6941output file.  All GOT references from a single input object
6942file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6943files might access different GOTs.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
6944
6945@ifclear GENERIC
6946@lowersections
6947@end ifclear
6948@end ifset
6949
6950@ifset MIPS
6951@ifclear GENERIC
6952@raisesections
6953@end ifclear
6954
6955@node MIPS
6956@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6957
6958@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6959@kindex --insn32
6960@kindex --no-insn32
6961The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6962microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6963in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation.  If @samp{--insn32} is
6964used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings.  By default
6965or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6966including 16-bit ones where possible.
6967
6968@ifclear GENERIC
6969@lowersections
6970@end ifclear
6971@end ifset
6972
6973@ifset MMIX
6974@ifclear GENERIC
6975@raisesections
6976@end ifclear
6977
6978@node MMIX
6979@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6980For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6981@code{mmo} object files when linking.  The simulator @code{mmix}
6982understands the @code{mmo} format.  The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6983can translate between the two formats.
6984
6985There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6986Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6987registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6988equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
6989@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6990global register multiplied by 8.  Register @code{$255} is not included in
6991this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6992symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6993
6994Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6995@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6996The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6997of a section.
6998
6999Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7000are left out from an mmo file.
7001
7002@ifclear GENERIC
7003@lowersections
7004@end ifclear
7005@end ifset
7006
7007@ifset MSP430
7008@ifclear GENERIC
7009@raisesections
7010@end ifclear
7011
7012@node  MSP430
7013@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7014For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7015will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs
7016just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7017
7018@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7019The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7020
7021@table @code
7022@item @samp{.vectors}
7023Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7024
7025@item @samp{.bootloader}
7026Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any code
7027in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7028
7029@item @samp{.infomem}
7030Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
7031this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7032
7033@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7034This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7035in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7036
7037@item @samp{.noinit}
7038Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7039
7040The last two sections are used by gcc.
7041@end table
7042
7043@ifclear GENERIC
7044@lowersections
7045@end ifclear
7046@end ifset
7047
7048@ifset NDS32
7049@ifclear GENERIC
7050@raisesections
7051@end ifclear
7052
7053@node NDS32
7054@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7055@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7056For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior.  The linker
7057relaxes objects according to these options.
7058
7059@table @code
7060@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7061Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7062
7063@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7064Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7065
7066@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7067Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7068
7069@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7070Export the EX9 table after linking.
7071
7072@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7073Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7074
7075@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7076Update the existing EX9 table.
7077
7078@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7079Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7080
7081@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7082Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7083
7084@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7085Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7086
7087@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7088Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7089@end table
7090
7091@ifclear GENERIC
7092@lowersections
7093@end ifclear
7094@end ifset
7095
7096@ifset NIOSII
7097@ifclear GENERIC
7098@raisesections
7099@end ifclear
7100
7101@node Nios II
7102@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7103@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7104@kindex --relax on Nios II
7105
7106Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7107transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7108which may result in @command{ld} giving
7109@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7110The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7111trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7112outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range.  These
7113trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7114be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7115larger than 256MB.
7116
7117The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7118is also specified.  You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7119@option{--no-relax} linker option.  You can also disable this optimization
7120locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7121source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7122register as a temporary.
7123
7124Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7125relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7126option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7127
7128@ifclear GENERIC
7129@lowersections
7130@end ifclear
7131@end ifset
7132
7133@ifset POWERPC
7134@ifclear GENERIC
7135@raisesections
7136@end ifclear
7137
7138@node PowerPC ELF32
7139@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7140@cindex PowerPC long branches
7141@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7142Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7143displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7144@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7145@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7146the entire 32-bit address space.  These trampolines are inserted at
7147section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7148section exceeds 33M in size.  You may combine @samp{-r} and
7149@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link.  In that case
7150both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7151considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7152
7153@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7154@table @option
7155@cindex PowerPC PLT
7156@kindex --bss-plt
7157@item --bss-plt
7158Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7159generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7160the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7161writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
7162@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7163PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7164compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}.  @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7165BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7166
7167@kindex --secure-plt
7168@item --secure-plt
7169@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7170@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7171when linking non-PIC code.  This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7172layout.  A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7173style BSS PLT.
7174
7175@cindex PowerPC GOT
7176@kindex --sdata-got
7177@item --sdata-got
7178The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7179sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The location of
7180@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7181section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The reason for the
7182@code{.got} change is more subtle:  The new placement allows
7183@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7184@samp{-z relro -z now}.  However, this placement means that
7185@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7186PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7187pointer.  @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement.  PowerPC
7188GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7189really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7190
7191@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7192@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7193@item --emit-stub-syms
7194This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7195symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7196
7197@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7198@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7199@item --no-tls-optimize
7200PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7201sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
7202disable the optimization.
7203@end table
7204
7205@ifclear GENERIC
7206@lowersections
7207@end ifclear
7208@end ifset
7209
7210@ifset POWERPC64
7211@ifclear GENERIC
7212@raisesections
7213@end ifclear
7214
7215@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7216@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7217
7218@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7219@table @option
7220@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7221@kindex --stub-group-size
7222@item --stub-group-size
7223Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs  and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7224by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7225@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7226sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed,
7227a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7228the stub section, and one group after it.  However, when using
7229conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7230prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7231A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7232branches to stubs always use a negative offset.  Two special values of
7233@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}.  These both instruct
7234@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7235detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7236positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7237
7238Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections.  A
7239single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7240create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
7241large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7242
7243@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7244@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7245@item --emit-stub-syms
7246This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7247symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7248
7249@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7250@kindex --dotsyms
7251@kindex --no-dotsyms
7252@item --dotsyms
7253@itemx --no-dotsyms
7254These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7255in a version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7256function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7257code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}).  To
7258properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7259to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}.  The option
7260@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7261dot-prefixed patterns.  Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7262feature.
7263
7264@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7265@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7266@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7267@item --save-restore-funcs
7268@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7269These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7270provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7271@samp{-Os} code.  The default is to provide any such referenced
7272function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7273link.
7274
7275@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7276@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7277@item --no-tls-optimize
7278PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7279sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
7280disable the optimization.
7281
7282@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7283@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7284@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7285@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7286@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7287These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7288stub to call __tls_get_addr.  PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7289an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7290@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7291stub without calling in to glibc.  By default the linker enables this
7292option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7293Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7294slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7295application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7296normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7297
7298@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7299@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7300@item --no-opd-optimize
7301PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7302corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7303the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7304Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7305
7306@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7307@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7308@item --non-overlapping-opd
7309Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7310@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7311the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7312entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7313
7314@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7315@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7316@item --no-toc-optimize
7317PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7318entries.  Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7319reference the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section
7320marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7321marks a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7322relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
7323unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
7324reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7325discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
7326reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7327code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to disable the
7328optimization.
7329
7330@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7331@kindex --no-multi-toc
7332@item --no-multi-toc
7333If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7334@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7335where TOC
7336entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This limits the
7337total TOC size to 64K.  PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7338grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7339TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7340calls.  @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7341help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
734264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7343Use this option to turn off this feature.
7344
7345@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7346@kindex --no-toc-sort
7347@item --no-toc-sort
7348By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7349happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7350placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7351with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7352referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7353@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options.  Doing this
7354results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC.  Use this option to turn
7355off this feature.
7356
7357@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7358@kindex --plt-align
7359@kindex --no-plt-align
7360@item --plt-align
7361@itemx --no-plt-align
7362Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7363padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7364specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}.  Note
7365that this isn't alignment in the usual sense.  By default PLT call
7366stubs are packed tightly.
7367
7368@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7369@kindex --plt-static-chain
7370@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7371@item --plt-static-chain
7372@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7373Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7374chain pointer (r11).  @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7375chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7376
7377@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7378@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7379@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7380@item --plt-thread-safe
7381@itemx --no-thread-safe
7382With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7383lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7384another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7385order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7386memory write barriers.  To avoid this we need some sort of read
7387barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1.  By default, @code{ld}
7388looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7389seen, adds the necessary barriers.  Use these options to change the
7390default behaviour.
7391@end table
7392
7393@ifclear GENERIC
7394@lowersections
7395@end ifclear
7396@end ifset
7397
7398@ifset SPU
7399@ifclear GENERIC
7400@raisesections
7401@end ifclear
7402
7403@node SPU ELF
7404@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7405
7406@cindex SPU ELF options
7407@table @option
7408
7409@cindex SPU plugins
7410@kindex --plugin
7411@item --plugin
7412This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7413
7414@cindex SPU overlays
7415@kindex --no-overlays
7416@item --no-overlays
7417Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7418regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7419@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager.  This option
7420turns off all this special overlay handling.
7421
7422@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7423@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7424@item --emit-stub-syms
7425This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7426symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7427
7428@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7429@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7430@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7431This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7432function calls out of overlay regions.  Normally stubs are not added
7433on calls to non-overlay regions.
7434
7435@cindex SPU local store size
7436@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7437@item --local-store=lo:hi
7438@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7439the address range 0 to 256k.  This option may be used to change the
7440range.  Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7441
7442@cindex SPU
7443@kindex --stack-analysis
7444@item --stack-analysis
7445SPU local store space is limited.  Over-allocation of stack space
7446unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7447under-allocation results in runtime failures.  If given this option,
7448@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7449@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7450determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7451for stack adjusting instructions.  A call-graph is created by looking
7452for relocations on branch instructions.  The graph is then searched
7453for the maximum stack usage path.  Note that this analysis does not
7454find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7455and other cycles in the call graph.  Stack usage may be
7456under-estimated if your code makes such calls.  Also, stack usage for
7457dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected.  If a link map
7458is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7459and calls will be given.
7460
7461@cindex SPU
7462@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7463@item --emit-stack-syms
7464This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7465in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7466These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7467functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7468functions.  @code{<number>} is the section id in hex.  The value of
7469such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7470The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7471@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7472@end table
7473
7474@ifclear GENERIC
7475@lowersections
7476@end ifclear
7477@end ifset
7478
7479@ifset TICOFF
7480@ifclear GENERIC
7481@raisesections
7482@end ifclear
7483
7484@node TI COFF
7485@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7486@cindex TI COFF versions
7487@kindex --format=@var{version}
7488The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7489TI COFF versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7490also supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7491format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7492header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7493
7494@ifclear GENERIC
7495@lowersections
7496@end ifclear
7497@end ifset
7498
7499@ifset WIN32
7500@ifclear GENERIC
7501@raisesections
7502@end ifclear
7503
7504@node WIN32
7505@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7506
7507This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7508See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7509command line options mentioned here.
7510
7511@table @emph
7512@cindex import libraries
7513@item import libraries
7514The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7515libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They are
7516regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7517archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7518support for creating such libraries provided with the
7519@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7520
7521@item   exporting DLL symbols
7522@cindex exporting DLL symbols
7523The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7524
7525@table @emph
7526@item   using auto-export functionality
7527@cindex using auto-export functionality
7528By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7529which is controlled by the following command line options:
7530
7531@itemize
7532@item --export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
7533@item --exclude-symbols
7534@item --exclude-libs
7535@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7536@item --version-script
7537@end itemize
7538
7539When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7540(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7541symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries.  As it will
7542often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7543private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7544options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7545exporting.  The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7546final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7547
7548If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7549command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7550if either of the following are true:
7551
7552@itemize
7553@item A DEF file is used.
7554@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7555@end itemize
7556
7557@item   using a DEF file
7558@cindex using a DEF file
7559Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF file is
7560an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7561exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7562name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7563command line.  The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7564
7565@example
7566gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7567@end example
7568
7569Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7570@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7571
7572Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7573
7574@example
7575LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7576
7577EXPORTS
7578foo
7579bar
7580_bar = bar
7581another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7582var1 DATA
7583doo = foo == foo2
7584eoo DATA == var1
7585@end example
7586
7587This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7588symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7589alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7590by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7591@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7592@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7593export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7594in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7595symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7596
7597The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7598name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7599the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7600
7601When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7602library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7603@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7604executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7605
7606With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7607specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7608non-default base address for the image.
7609
7610If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor  @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7611or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7612filename specified on the command line.
7613
7614The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7615
7616@example
7617EXPORTS
7618  ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7619     | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7620  [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7621@end example
7622
7623Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7624@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7625@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7626@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7627Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7628@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7629string in import/export table for the symbol.
7630
7631The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7632
7633@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table.  It
7634will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7635by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7636linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7637library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7638
7639@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7640The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7641the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7642@code{*_imp__foo}).
7643
7644@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7645well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7646read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7647variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7648the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7649extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7650application will behave unexpectedly.
7651
7652@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7653it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7654symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7655API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7656the DLL without an import library.
7657
7658See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7659other DEF file statements
7660
7661@cindex creating a DEF file
7662While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7663with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7664
7665@item   Using decorations
7666@cindex Using decorations
7667Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7668itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7669declared as:
7670
7671@example
7672__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7673__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7674@end example
7675
7676All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
7677any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7678this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7679the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7680
7681Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7682decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use dllimport,
7683instead:
7684
7685@example
7686__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7687__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7688@end example
7689
7690This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7691when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7692variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7693code the header must declare them as dllimport.  There are a number
7694of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7695omit the __declspec() declaration completely.  See
7696@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7697information.
7698@end table
7699
7700@cindex automatic data imports
7701@item automatic data imports
7702The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7703by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7704compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7705issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7706code to these platforms, especially for large
7707c++ libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
7708initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7709decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7710platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7711command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7712The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7713suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7714trigger the feature's use.
7715
7716auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7717additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
7718
7719"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7720documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7721
7722The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7723occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7724One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7725below.
7726
7727@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7728For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7729object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7730offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7731field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7732in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7733without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7734The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7735references.
7736
7737The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7738be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7739themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7740runtime environment.  Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7741compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the
7742support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7743run without error on an older system.
7744
7745@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7746enabled as needed.
7747
7748@cindex direct linking to a dll
7749@item direct linking to a dll
7750The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7751including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7752libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7753traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7754libraries or applications.  When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7755function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7756though a single bfd could contain many exports.  The overhead involved in
7757storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7758tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7759large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7760
7761Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7762@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7763of names to match each library.  All that is needed from the developer's
7764perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7765select the dll instead of an import library.
7766
7767
7768For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7769to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7770
7771@example
7772libxxx.dll.a
7773xxx.dll.a
7774libxxx.a
7775xxx.lib
7776cygxxx.dll (*)
7777libxxx.dll
7778xxx.dll
7779@end example
7780
7781before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7782
7783(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7784where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7785@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7786file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7787@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7788
7789Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7790@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature.  It
7791was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7792various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7793could coexist on the same machine.
7794
7795The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7796applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7797libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7798
7799@example
7800bin/
7801	cygxxx.dll
7802lib/
7803	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
7804	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
7805@end example
7806
7807Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7808done two ways:
7809
78101. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7811@example
7812gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7813@end example
7814
7815However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7816(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7817@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version.  Import libs are generally
7818not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7819
78202. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7821directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
7822should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7823making the app/dll.
7824
7825@example
7826ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7827@end example
7828
7829Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7830
7831@example
7832gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7833@end example
7834
7835This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7836perfectly legal
7837
7838@example
7839bin/
7840	cygxxx-5.dll
7841lib/
7842	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7843@end example
7844
7845Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7846even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7847@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7848
7849Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7850wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There are three reasons:
7851
78521. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7853work with auto-imported data.
7854
78552. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7856import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7857symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again, the import lib
7858for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7859possible to do this without an import lib.
7860
78613. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib.  This is
7862critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7863in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7864stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7865
7866So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
7867true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7868a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7869binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the
7870massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7871requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7872will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7873
7874@item symbol aliasing
7875@table @emph
7876@item adding additional names
7877Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7878A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7879exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7880when creating the dll.  This will affect also the optional created
7881import library.  Consider the following DEF file:
7882
7883@example
7884LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7885
7886EXPORTS
7887foo
7888_foo = foo
7889@end example
7890
7891The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7892
7893Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7894source code using the "weak" attribute:
7895
7896@example
7897void foo () @{ /* Do something.  */; @}
7898void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7899@end example
7900
7901See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7902symbols.
7903
7904@item renaming symbols
7905Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the cygwin
7906kernel does this regularly.  A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7907@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7908DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7909created).  In the following example:
7910
7911@example
7912LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7913
7914EXPORTS
7915_foo = foo
7916@end example
7917
7918The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7919@samp{_foo}.
7920@end table
7921
7922Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7923unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7924If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7925@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7926that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7927@samp{--export-all-symbols} option.  If you list only the
7928renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7929to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7930the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7931In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7932which is probably not what you wanted.
7933
7934@cindex weak externals
7935@item weak externals
7936The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7937weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7938defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol.  There
7939are three variants of weak externals:
7940@itemize
7941@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7942called lazy externals.
7943@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7944This form is not presently implemented.
7945@item No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
7946implemented.
7947@end itemize
7948As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7949are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7950uses a default value.
7951
7952@cindex aligned common symbols
7953@item aligned common symbols
7954As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7955desired alignment for a common symbol.  This information is conveyed from
7956the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7957carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7958by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols.  Native
7959tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7960but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7961warnings about unknown linker directives.
7962
7963@end table
7964
7965@ifclear GENERIC
7966@lowersections
7967@end ifclear
7968@end ifset
7969
7970@ifset XTENSA
7971@ifclear GENERIC
7972@raisesections
7973@end ifclear
7974
7975@node Xtensa
7976@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7977
7978@cindex Xtensa processors
7979The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7980@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7981specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7982keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
7983example, with the command:
7984
7985@smallexample
7986SECTIONS
7987@{
7988  .text : @{
7989    *(.literal .text)
7990  @}
7991@}
7992@end smallexample
7993
7994@noindent
7995@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7996and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7997literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid
7998interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7999group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8000files.  Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8001and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8002
8003@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8004@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8005Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8006provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
8007is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
8008literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8009will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8010location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8011the @code{L32R} instructions.  The second optimization is to remove
8012unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8013@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8014range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8015
8016For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8017to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8018instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8019instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8020instruction if it is not used for anything else.  Removing the
8021@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8022hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8023By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8024switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8025density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8026instruction that was removed.  If code size is more important than
8027performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8028linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8029a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8030
8031The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8032control the linker:
8033
8034@cindex Xtensa options
8035@table @option
8036@item --size-opt
8037When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8038more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not insert
8039no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8040alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8041preserve the correctness of the code.
8042@end table
8043
8044@ifclear GENERIC
8045@lowersections
8046@end ifclear
8047@end ifset
8048
8049@ifclear SingleFormat
8050@node BFD
8051@chapter BFD
8052
8053@cindex back end
8054@cindex object file management
8055@cindex object formats available
8056@kindex objdump -i
8057The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8058These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8059object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
8060format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8061it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8062associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8063object file formats available.  You can use @code{objdump -i}
8064(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8065list all the formats available for your configuration.
8066
8067@cindex BFD requirements
8068@cindex requirements for BFD
8069As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8070several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8071BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8072formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8073been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8074BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8075may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8076
8077One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8078mind is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
8079useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8080conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8081
8082@menu
8083* BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
8084@end menu
8085
8086@node BFD outline
8087@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8088@cindex opening object files
8089@include bfdsumm.texi
8090@end ifclear
8091
8092@node Reporting Bugs
8093@chapter Reporting Bugs
8094@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8095@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8096
8097Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8098
8099Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8100it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8101to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8102work better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8103@command{ld}.
8104
8105In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8106information that enables us to fix the bug.
8107
8108@menu
8109* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
8110* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
8111@end menu
8112
8113@node Bug Criteria
8114@section Have You Found a Bug?
8115@cindex bug criteria
8116
8117If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8118
8119@itemize @bullet
8120@cindex fatal signal
8121@cindex linker crash
8122@cindex crash of linker
8123@item
8124If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8125@command{ld} bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
8126
8127@cindex error on valid input
8128@item
8129If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8130
8131@cindex invalid input
8132@item
8133If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8134may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8135object files are correct.
8136
8137@item
8138If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8139improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8140@end itemize
8141
8142@node Bug Reporting
8143@section How to Report Bugs
8144@cindex bug reports
8145@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8146
8147A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8148products.  If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8149recommend you contact that organization first.
8150
8151You can find contact information for many support companies and
8152individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8153distribution.
8154
8155@ifset BUGURL
8156Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8157@value{BUGURL}.
8158@end ifset
8159
8160The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8161@strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
8162fact or leave it out, state it!
8163
8164Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8165problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
8166assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8167matter.  Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps
8168the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8169location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8170were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8171into doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
8172specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8173and the most helpful.
8174
8175Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8176the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
8177on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8178
8179Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8180bell?''  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
8181respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8182You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8183
8184To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8185
8186@itemize @bullet
8187@item
8188The version of @command{ld}.  @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8189the @samp{--version} argument.
8190
8191Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8192the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8193
8194@item
8195Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8196patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8197
8198@item
8199The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8200version number.
8201
8202@item
8203What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8204``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8205
8206@item
8207The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8208observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8209list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8210sufficient.
8211
8212If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8213and then we might not encounter the bug.
8214
8215@item
8216A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8217bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8218provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than 10K.  For
8219bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8220state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8221requests them.  (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8222we do not want to clog it up with large attachments).  But small
8223attachments are best.
8224
8225If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8226@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8227object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8228@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files.  Also say
8229how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8230
8231@item
8232A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8233incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8234
8235Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8236will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8237not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us
8238a chance to make a mistake.
8239
8240Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8241say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8242copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8243C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash
8244and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8245fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If
8246you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8247any conclusion from our observations.
8248
8249@item
8250If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8251diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8252@samp{-p} option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8253If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8254context, not by line number.
8255
8256The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8257sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8258@end itemize
8259
8260Here are some things that are not necessary:
8261
8262@itemize @bullet
8263@item
8264A description of the envelope of the bug.
8265
8266Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8267which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8268changes will not affect it.
8269
8270This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8271will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8272with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8273We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8274
8275Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8276of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
8277output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8278less time, and so on.
8279
8280However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8281report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8282
8283@item
8284A patch for the bug.
8285
8286A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
8287the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8288a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
8289to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8290
8291Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8292construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8293through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8294able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8295fixed.
8296
8297And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8298patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
8299help us to understand.
8300
8301@item
8302A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8303
8304Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
8305things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8306@end itemize
8307
8308@node MRI
8309@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8310@cindex MRI compatibility
8311To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8312linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8313alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8314described in @ref{Scripts}.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8315simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8316@command{ld}.  @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8317linker commands; these commands are described here.
8318
8319In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8320file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8321features to make use of them.
8322
8323You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8324@samp{-c} command-line option.
8325
8326Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8327command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8328blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
8329MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8330issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8331
8332Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8333
8334You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8335lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8336The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8337
8338@table @code
8339@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8340@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8341@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8342Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8343the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8344@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8345your output program.  If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8346script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8347commands will appear in the linker output.  You can still use other
8348input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8349@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8350
8351@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8352@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8353Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8354in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8355
8356@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8357
8358@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8359@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8360Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}.  The
8361@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8362
8363@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8364@item BASE @var{expression}
8365Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8366absolute addresses) in the output file.
8367
8368@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8369@item CHIP @var{expression}
8370@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8371This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8372
8373@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8374@item END
8375This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8376
8377@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8378@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8379Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8380language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8381
8382@enumerate
8383@item
8384S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8385
8386@item
8387IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8388
8389@item
8390COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8391@samp{COFF}
8392@end enumerate
8393
8394@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8395@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8396Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8397@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8398
8399The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8400same line, with no change in its effect.
8401
8402@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8403@item LOAD @var{filename}
8404@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8405Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8406same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8407command line.
8408
8409@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8410@item NAME @var{output-name}
8411@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8412MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8413option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8414
8415@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8416@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8417@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8418Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8419order in which they first appear in the input files.  In an MRI-compatible
8420script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command.  The
8421sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8422file, in the order specified.
8423
8424@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8425@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8426@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8427@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8428Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8429@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8430
8431@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8432@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8433@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8434@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8435You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8436specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8437If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8438@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8439@end table
8440
8441@node GNU Free Documentation License
8442@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8443@include fdl.texi
8444
8445@node LD Index
8446@unnumbered LD Index
8447
8448@printindex cp
8449
8450@tex
8451% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo.  In the
8452% meantime:
8453\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8454\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8455\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8456\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8457\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8458\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8459\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8460\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8461\page\colophon
8462% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8463@end tex
8464
8465@bye
8466